What we are reading Volume 2 - blog.abakkusinvest.com
Transcript of What we are reading Volume 2 - blog.abakkusinvest.com
What we are reading ndash Volume 2002
India Strategy
- ICICI Securities
Uttar Pradesh-Breaking free from the shackles of lsquoBIMARUrsquo tag
- Spark Capital
Update on how is GST progressing
- Edelweiss
Cheap data driving profound changes
- Neelkanth Mishra
The Value of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
- Outlook Business
This investor rivals Warren Buffett and you probably havenrsquot heard of him
- Market Watch
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
-Morgan Stanley
The Psychology of Money
- The Collaborative Fund
Please refer to important disclosures at the end of this report
`
Equity Research May 29 2018
Nifty 50 10633
ICICI Securities Limited is the author and distributor of this report
Cashless status report Cash is back CIC at 116 of GDP (18-Mayrsquo18) ndash back in range
Cashless transactions (ex-RTGS) continue to rise
Previous report ldquoTez-i in digital paymentsrdquo
Strategy
Cashless transactions continue their uptrendhellip so does cash in circulation
116
4
6
8
10
12
14
Jan
11
May 1
1
Se
p 1
1
Jan
12
May 1
2
Se
p 1
2
Jan
13
May 1
3
Se
p 1
3
Jan
14
May 1
4
Se
p 1
4
Jan
15
May 1
5
Se
p 1
5
Jan
16
May 1
6
Se
p 1
6
Jan
17
May 1
7
Se
p 1
7
Jan
18
May 1
8
CIC as a of GDP
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Feb1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Mar14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Feb1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Research Analysts
Vinod Karki vinodkarkiicicisecuritiescom +91 22 6637 7586
Siddharth Gupta siddharthguptaicicisecuritiescom +91 22 2277 7607
As the transient effects of demonetisation fade we analyse the latest trends in Indiarsquos move toward a cashless economy which incidentally was one of the stated objectives of demonetisation Key trends observed are
Cash levels in the economy did not decrease permanently After dipping significantly post demonetisation cash in circulation (CIC) at Rs1933tn is back to the trend growth seen in the pre-demonetisation period which has resulted in CIC as a percentage of GDP inch closer to the pre-demonetisation level of ~12
Value of cash withdrawals from ATMs has risen back to pre-demonetisation period at ~Rs25trn per monthhellip In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos has been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation
hellipalthough number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transaction above a certain level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal per ATM transaction has increased
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at a faster pace than in pre demonetisation periodhellip Overall cashless transactions (ex-RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and irreversible trend
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS (Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth) growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brake on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
POS terminals continue to rise along with number of cards issued by banks while ATM growth plateaus Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in 2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline in transactions by value
Private sector banks have a distinct edge over their PSU counterparts in terms of electronic transactions but the reverse is true for ATM networks and cash transactions at ATMs To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in FY18 from 3 in FY08 for HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by branches has fallen from 43 to 8 Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share 82) and debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51) transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
INDIA
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
2
Cash levels in the economy did not decrease permanently
After dipping significantly post demonetisation cash in circulation (CIC) at Rs1933tn is
back to the trend growth seen in the pre-demonetisation period which has resulted in
CIC as a percentage of GDP inch closer to the pre-demonetisation level of ~12 as on
18-Mayrsquo18 (at 116)
Chart 1 Currency in circulation rose back sharply at Rs1933tn as
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 2 CIC at 116 of GDP ndash back in range
Note Trailing 12-month GDP has been used and for Aprrsquo18 and Mayrsquo18 advance estimates have been used Source CEIC ISec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Jan
-05
Jul-0
5
Jan
-06
Jul-0
6
Jan
-07
Jul-0
7
Jan
-08
Jul-0
8
Jan
-09
Jul-0
9
Jan
-10
Jul-1
0
Jan
-11
Jul-1
1
Jan
-12
Jul-1
2
Jan
-13
Jul-1
3
Jan
-14
Jul-1
4
Jan
-15
Jul-1
5
Jan
-16
Jul-1
6
Jan
-17
Jul-1
7
Jan
-18
(Rs tn
)
Currency in circulation Trend - CIC Trend - but with the 2016 shift
116
4
6
8
10
12
14
Jan
11
May 1
1
Se
p 1
1
Jan
12
Ma
y 1
2
Se
p 1
2
Jan
13
Ma
y 1
3
Se
p 1
3
Jan
14
Ma
y 1
4
Se
p 1
4
Jan
15
Ma
y 1
5
Se
p 1
5
Jan
16
Ma
y 1
6
Se
p 1
6
Jan
17
Ma
y 1
7
Se
p 1
7
Jan
18
Ma
y 1
8
CIC as a of GDP
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
3
Value of cash withdrawals back to pre-demon range although number of withdrawals remains low
In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos have been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation at around
Rs25tn However number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying
higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transactions above a certain
level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal
per ATM transaction has increased
Chart 3 Value of withdrawals has come back within trend
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 4 Number of withdrawals has reduced considerably
Source CEIC ISec Research
00
05
10
15
20
25
30
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Ju
l12
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Ju
l13
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Ju
l14
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Ju
l15
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Ju
l16
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Ju
l17
Oct1
7
Jan
18
(Rs trn
)
Value Debit Card Usage at ATMs Trendline
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Jul1
2
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Jul1
3
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Jul1
4
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Jul1
5
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Jul1
6
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Jul1
7
Oct1
7
Jan
18
Number of usages (mn) Trendline
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
4
Overall cashless transactions continue to growhellip
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at
a faster pace than in pre-demonetisation period Overall cashless transactions (ex-
RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It
indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and
irreversible trend
Table 1 Strong growth registered across payment modes
Mode of Transaction
Volume (mn) Value (Rs bn)
Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth
RTGS (customer transactions) 30 34 12 247071 290500 18
Paper Clearing 367 298 -19 22343 21308 -5
Retail electronic clearing 1208 1505 25 42252 58660 39
- NEFT 499 548 10 38527 52759 37
- IMPS 190 309 63 1538 2803 82
- NACH (National Automated Clearing House) 517 646 25 2154 3073 43
Cards at POS 2153 2434 13
- Credit Card at POS 315 372 18 948 1234 30
- Debit Card at POS 852 902 6 1205 1200 0
Pre-Paid Instruments (M-Wallets PPI Cards Vouchers) 918 1000 9 313 416 33
Cashless transactions (Ex-RTGS) 3660 4077 11 67062 82818 23
UPI 14 501 34x 60 589 89x
OS Credit cards - Number and balance os (avg) 29 37 26 504 666 32
Number of OS cards ndash Debit Card (avg) 770 854 11
Number of POS (lsquo000s) (avg) 2257 3093 37
Number of ATMs (lsquo000s) (avg) 221 222 0
Mobile Banking 315 676 114 4394 3649 -17
Debit Card ndash usage at ATM 2115 2235 6 5704 7689 35
Source CEIC I-Sec Research
To understand the demonetisation impact we compared the numbers with the
numbers extrapolated from the pre-demonetisation trend ndash and found that cashless
transactions were up 55 in value terms and 72 in volume terms from the numbers
suggested by the historic trend
Chart 5 Monthly Cashless transactions (in value terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Chart 6 Monthly Cashless transactions (in Volume terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Source CEIC I-Sec Research Source CEIC I-Sec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
Ma
y1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
(Rs tn)
Cashless transactions (Value) Trendline
55
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Ja
n1
5
Ju
n1
5
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Please refer to important disclosures at the end of this report
`
Equity Research May 29 2018
Nifty 50 10633
ICICI Securities Limited is the author and distributor of this report
Cashless status report Cash is back CIC at 116 of GDP (18-Mayrsquo18) ndash back in range
Cashless transactions (ex-RTGS) continue to rise
Previous report ldquoTez-i in digital paymentsrdquo
Strategy
Cashless transactions continue their uptrendhellip so does cash in circulation
116
4
6
8
10
12
14
Jan
11
May 1
1
Se
p 1
1
Jan
12
May 1
2
Se
p 1
2
Jan
13
May 1
3
Se
p 1
3
Jan
14
May 1
4
Se
p 1
4
Jan
15
May 1
5
Se
p 1
5
Jan
16
May 1
6
Se
p 1
6
Jan
17
May 1
7
Se
p 1
7
Jan
18
May 1
8
CIC as a of GDP
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Feb1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Mar14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Feb1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Research Analysts
Vinod Karki vinodkarkiicicisecuritiescom +91 22 6637 7586
Siddharth Gupta siddharthguptaicicisecuritiescom +91 22 2277 7607
As the transient effects of demonetisation fade we analyse the latest trends in Indiarsquos move toward a cashless economy which incidentally was one of the stated objectives of demonetisation Key trends observed are
Cash levels in the economy did not decrease permanently After dipping significantly post demonetisation cash in circulation (CIC) at Rs1933tn is back to the trend growth seen in the pre-demonetisation period which has resulted in CIC as a percentage of GDP inch closer to the pre-demonetisation level of ~12
Value of cash withdrawals from ATMs has risen back to pre-demonetisation period at ~Rs25trn per monthhellip In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos has been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation
hellipalthough number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transaction above a certain level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal per ATM transaction has increased
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at a faster pace than in pre demonetisation periodhellip Overall cashless transactions (ex-RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and irreversible trend
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS (Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth) growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brake on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
POS terminals continue to rise along with number of cards issued by banks while ATM growth plateaus Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in 2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline in transactions by value
Private sector banks have a distinct edge over their PSU counterparts in terms of electronic transactions but the reverse is true for ATM networks and cash transactions at ATMs To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in FY18 from 3 in FY08 for HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by branches has fallen from 43 to 8 Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share 82) and debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51) transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
INDIA
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
2
Cash levels in the economy did not decrease permanently
After dipping significantly post demonetisation cash in circulation (CIC) at Rs1933tn is
back to the trend growth seen in the pre-demonetisation period which has resulted in
CIC as a percentage of GDP inch closer to the pre-demonetisation level of ~12 as on
18-Mayrsquo18 (at 116)
Chart 1 Currency in circulation rose back sharply at Rs1933tn as
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 2 CIC at 116 of GDP ndash back in range
Note Trailing 12-month GDP has been used and for Aprrsquo18 and Mayrsquo18 advance estimates have been used Source CEIC ISec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Jan
-05
Jul-0
5
Jan
-06
Jul-0
6
Jan
-07
Jul-0
7
Jan
-08
Jul-0
8
Jan
-09
Jul-0
9
Jan
-10
Jul-1
0
Jan
-11
Jul-1
1
Jan
-12
Jul-1
2
Jan
-13
Jul-1
3
Jan
-14
Jul-1
4
Jan
-15
Jul-1
5
Jan
-16
Jul-1
6
Jan
-17
Jul-1
7
Jan
-18
(Rs tn
)
Currency in circulation Trend - CIC Trend - but with the 2016 shift
116
4
6
8
10
12
14
Jan
11
May 1
1
Se
p 1
1
Jan
12
Ma
y 1
2
Se
p 1
2
Jan
13
Ma
y 1
3
Se
p 1
3
Jan
14
Ma
y 1
4
Se
p 1
4
Jan
15
Ma
y 1
5
Se
p 1
5
Jan
16
Ma
y 1
6
Se
p 1
6
Jan
17
Ma
y 1
7
Se
p 1
7
Jan
18
Ma
y 1
8
CIC as a of GDP
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
3
Value of cash withdrawals back to pre-demon range although number of withdrawals remains low
In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos have been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation at around
Rs25tn However number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying
higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transactions above a certain
level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal
per ATM transaction has increased
Chart 3 Value of withdrawals has come back within trend
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 4 Number of withdrawals has reduced considerably
Source CEIC ISec Research
00
05
10
15
20
25
30
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Ju
l12
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Ju
l13
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Ju
l14
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Ju
l15
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Ju
l16
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Ju
l17
Oct1
7
Jan
18
(Rs trn
)
Value Debit Card Usage at ATMs Trendline
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Jul1
2
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Jul1
3
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Jul1
4
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Jul1
5
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Jul1
6
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Jul1
7
Oct1
7
Jan
18
Number of usages (mn) Trendline
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
4
Overall cashless transactions continue to growhellip
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at
a faster pace than in pre-demonetisation period Overall cashless transactions (ex-
RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It
indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and
irreversible trend
Table 1 Strong growth registered across payment modes
Mode of Transaction
Volume (mn) Value (Rs bn)
Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth
RTGS (customer transactions) 30 34 12 247071 290500 18
Paper Clearing 367 298 -19 22343 21308 -5
Retail electronic clearing 1208 1505 25 42252 58660 39
- NEFT 499 548 10 38527 52759 37
- IMPS 190 309 63 1538 2803 82
- NACH (National Automated Clearing House) 517 646 25 2154 3073 43
Cards at POS 2153 2434 13
- Credit Card at POS 315 372 18 948 1234 30
- Debit Card at POS 852 902 6 1205 1200 0
Pre-Paid Instruments (M-Wallets PPI Cards Vouchers) 918 1000 9 313 416 33
Cashless transactions (Ex-RTGS) 3660 4077 11 67062 82818 23
UPI 14 501 34x 60 589 89x
OS Credit cards - Number and balance os (avg) 29 37 26 504 666 32
Number of OS cards ndash Debit Card (avg) 770 854 11
Number of POS (lsquo000s) (avg) 2257 3093 37
Number of ATMs (lsquo000s) (avg) 221 222 0
Mobile Banking 315 676 114 4394 3649 -17
Debit Card ndash usage at ATM 2115 2235 6 5704 7689 35
Source CEIC I-Sec Research
To understand the demonetisation impact we compared the numbers with the
numbers extrapolated from the pre-demonetisation trend ndash and found that cashless
transactions were up 55 in value terms and 72 in volume terms from the numbers
suggested by the historic trend
Chart 5 Monthly Cashless transactions (in value terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Chart 6 Monthly Cashless transactions (in Volume terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Source CEIC I-Sec Research Source CEIC I-Sec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
Ma
y1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
(Rs tn)
Cashless transactions (Value) Trendline
55
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Ja
n1
5
Ju
n1
5
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
2
Cash levels in the economy did not decrease permanently
After dipping significantly post demonetisation cash in circulation (CIC) at Rs1933tn is
back to the trend growth seen in the pre-demonetisation period which has resulted in
CIC as a percentage of GDP inch closer to the pre-demonetisation level of ~12 as on
18-Mayrsquo18 (at 116)
Chart 1 Currency in circulation rose back sharply at Rs1933tn as
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 2 CIC at 116 of GDP ndash back in range
Note Trailing 12-month GDP has been used and for Aprrsquo18 and Mayrsquo18 advance estimates have been used Source CEIC ISec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Jan
-05
Jul-0
5
Jan
-06
Jul-0
6
Jan
-07
Jul-0
7
Jan
-08
Jul-0
8
Jan
-09
Jul-0
9
Jan
-10
Jul-1
0
Jan
-11
Jul-1
1
Jan
-12
Jul-1
2
Jan
-13
Jul-1
3
Jan
-14
Jul-1
4
Jan
-15
Jul-1
5
Jan
-16
Jul-1
6
Jan
-17
Jul-1
7
Jan
-18
(Rs tn
)
Currency in circulation Trend - CIC Trend - but with the 2016 shift
116
4
6
8
10
12
14
Jan
11
May 1
1
Se
p 1
1
Jan
12
Ma
y 1
2
Se
p 1
2
Jan
13
Ma
y 1
3
Se
p 1
3
Jan
14
Ma
y 1
4
Se
p 1
4
Jan
15
Ma
y 1
5
Se
p 1
5
Jan
16
Ma
y 1
6
Se
p 1
6
Jan
17
Ma
y 1
7
Se
p 1
7
Jan
18
Ma
y 1
8
CIC as a of GDP
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
3
Value of cash withdrawals back to pre-demon range although number of withdrawals remains low
In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos have been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation at around
Rs25tn However number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying
higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transactions above a certain
level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal
per ATM transaction has increased
Chart 3 Value of withdrawals has come back within trend
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 4 Number of withdrawals has reduced considerably
Source CEIC ISec Research
00
05
10
15
20
25
30
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Ju
l12
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Ju
l13
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Ju
l14
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Ju
l15
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Ju
l16
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Ju
l17
Oct1
7
Jan
18
(Rs trn
)
Value Debit Card Usage at ATMs Trendline
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Jul1
2
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Jul1
3
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Jul1
4
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Jul1
5
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Jul1
6
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Jul1
7
Oct1
7
Jan
18
Number of usages (mn) Trendline
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
4
Overall cashless transactions continue to growhellip
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at
a faster pace than in pre-demonetisation period Overall cashless transactions (ex-
RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It
indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and
irreversible trend
Table 1 Strong growth registered across payment modes
Mode of Transaction
Volume (mn) Value (Rs bn)
Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth
RTGS (customer transactions) 30 34 12 247071 290500 18
Paper Clearing 367 298 -19 22343 21308 -5
Retail electronic clearing 1208 1505 25 42252 58660 39
- NEFT 499 548 10 38527 52759 37
- IMPS 190 309 63 1538 2803 82
- NACH (National Automated Clearing House) 517 646 25 2154 3073 43
Cards at POS 2153 2434 13
- Credit Card at POS 315 372 18 948 1234 30
- Debit Card at POS 852 902 6 1205 1200 0
Pre-Paid Instruments (M-Wallets PPI Cards Vouchers) 918 1000 9 313 416 33
Cashless transactions (Ex-RTGS) 3660 4077 11 67062 82818 23
UPI 14 501 34x 60 589 89x
OS Credit cards - Number and balance os (avg) 29 37 26 504 666 32
Number of OS cards ndash Debit Card (avg) 770 854 11
Number of POS (lsquo000s) (avg) 2257 3093 37
Number of ATMs (lsquo000s) (avg) 221 222 0
Mobile Banking 315 676 114 4394 3649 -17
Debit Card ndash usage at ATM 2115 2235 6 5704 7689 35
Source CEIC I-Sec Research
To understand the demonetisation impact we compared the numbers with the
numbers extrapolated from the pre-demonetisation trend ndash and found that cashless
transactions were up 55 in value terms and 72 in volume terms from the numbers
suggested by the historic trend
Chart 5 Monthly Cashless transactions (in value terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Chart 6 Monthly Cashless transactions (in Volume terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Source CEIC I-Sec Research Source CEIC I-Sec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
Ma
y1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
(Rs tn)
Cashless transactions (Value) Trendline
55
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Ja
n1
5
Ju
n1
5
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
3
Value of cash withdrawals back to pre-demon range although number of withdrawals remains low
In a trend reversal the amount of cash withdrawn from bank accounts via ATMrsquos have been inching up and is now comparable to trends seen pre-demonetisation at around
Rs25tn However number of cash withdrawals continues to be below trend implying
higher cash withdrawals per transaction at ATMs As ATM transactions above a certain
level (varies from bank to bank) are charged by banks the quantum of cash withdrawal
per ATM transaction has increased
Chart 3 Value of withdrawals has come back within trend
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 4 Number of withdrawals has reduced considerably
Source CEIC ISec Research
00
05
10
15
20
25
30
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Ju
l12
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Ju
l13
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Ju
l14
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Ju
l15
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Ju
l16
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Ju
l17
Oct1
7
Jan
18
(Rs trn
)
Value Debit Card Usage at ATMs Trendline
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Ap
r1
1
Jul1
1
Oct1
1
Jan
12
Ap
r1
2
Jul1
2
Oct1
2
Jan
13
Ap
r1
3
Jul1
3
Oct1
3
Jan
14
Ap
r1
4
Jul1
4
Oct1
4
Jan
15
Ap
r1
5
Jul1
5
Oct1
5
Jan
16
Ap
r1
6
Jul1
6
Oct1
6
Jan
17
Ap
r1
7
Jul1
7
Oct1
7
Jan
18
Number of usages (mn) Trendline
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
4
Overall cashless transactions continue to growhellip
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at
a faster pace than in pre-demonetisation period Overall cashless transactions (ex-
RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It
indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and
irreversible trend
Table 1 Strong growth registered across payment modes
Mode of Transaction
Volume (mn) Value (Rs bn)
Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth
RTGS (customer transactions) 30 34 12 247071 290500 18
Paper Clearing 367 298 -19 22343 21308 -5
Retail electronic clearing 1208 1505 25 42252 58660 39
- NEFT 499 548 10 38527 52759 37
- IMPS 190 309 63 1538 2803 82
- NACH (National Automated Clearing House) 517 646 25 2154 3073 43
Cards at POS 2153 2434 13
- Credit Card at POS 315 372 18 948 1234 30
- Debit Card at POS 852 902 6 1205 1200 0
Pre-Paid Instruments (M-Wallets PPI Cards Vouchers) 918 1000 9 313 416 33
Cashless transactions (Ex-RTGS) 3660 4077 11 67062 82818 23
UPI 14 501 34x 60 589 89x
OS Credit cards - Number and balance os (avg) 29 37 26 504 666 32
Number of OS cards ndash Debit Card (avg) 770 854 11
Number of POS (lsquo000s) (avg) 2257 3093 37
Number of ATMs (lsquo000s) (avg) 221 222 0
Mobile Banking 315 676 114 4394 3649 -17
Debit Card ndash usage at ATM 2115 2235 6 5704 7689 35
Source CEIC I-Sec Research
To understand the demonetisation impact we compared the numbers with the
numbers extrapolated from the pre-demonetisation trend ndash and found that cashless
transactions were up 55 in value terms and 72 in volume terms from the numbers
suggested by the historic trend
Chart 5 Monthly Cashless transactions (in value terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Chart 6 Monthly Cashless transactions (in Volume terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Source CEIC I-Sec Research Source CEIC I-Sec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
Ma
y1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
(Rs tn)
Cashless transactions (Value) Trendline
55
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Ja
n1
5
Ju
n1
5
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
4
Overall cashless transactions continue to growhellip
Despite rising CIC overall cashless transactions value (ex-RTGS) continues to grow at
a faster pace than in pre-demonetisation period Overall cashless transactions (ex-
RTGS) hit Rs828trn in Q4FY18 a robust 23 growth on the high base of last year It
indicates that the growth in electronic digital transactions is a permanent and
irreversible trend
Table 1 Strong growth registered across payment modes
Mode of Transaction
Volume (mn) Value (Rs bn)
Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth Jan-Mar17 Jan-Mar18 Growth
RTGS (customer transactions) 30 34 12 247071 290500 18
Paper Clearing 367 298 -19 22343 21308 -5
Retail electronic clearing 1208 1505 25 42252 58660 39
- NEFT 499 548 10 38527 52759 37
- IMPS 190 309 63 1538 2803 82
- NACH (National Automated Clearing House) 517 646 25 2154 3073 43
Cards at POS 2153 2434 13
- Credit Card at POS 315 372 18 948 1234 30
- Debit Card at POS 852 902 6 1205 1200 0
Pre-Paid Instruments (M-Wallets PPI Cards Vouchers) 918 1000 9 313 416 33
Cashless transactions (Ex-RTGS) 3660 4077 11 67062 82818 23
UPI 14 501 34x 60 589 89x
OS Credit cards - Number and balance os (avg) 29 37 26 504 666 32
Number of OS cards ndash Debit Card (avg) 770 854 11
Number of POS (lsquo000s) (avg) 2257 3093 37
Number of ATMs (lsquo000s) (avg) 221 222 0
Mobile Banking 315 676 114 4394 3649 -17
Debit Card ndash usage at ATM 2115 2235 6 5704 7689 35
Source CEIC I-Sec Research
To understand the demonetisation impact we compared the numbers with the
numbers extrapolated from the pre-demonetisation trend ndash and found that cashless
transactions were up 55 in value terms and 72 in volume terms from the numbers
suggested by the historic trend
Chart 5 Monthly Cashless transactions (in value terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Chart 6 Monthly Cashless transactions (in Volume terms) (Ex-RTGS)
Source CEIC I-Sec Research Source CEIC I-Sec Research
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
Ma
y1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Jan
15
Jun
15
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
(Rs tn)
Cashless transactions (Value) Trendline
55
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
Ap
r1
1
Se
p1
1
Fe
b1
2
Jul1
2
Dec1
2
May1
3
Oct1
3
Ma
r14
Au
g1
4
Ja
n1
5
Ju
n1
5
Nov1
5
Ap
r1
6
Se
p1
6
Fe
b1
7
Jul1
7
Dec1
7
Cashless transactions (Volume in mn ) Trendline
72
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
5
hellipdriven by NEFT IMPS UPI and cards at POS Rise in cashless transactions is driven by NEFT (Rs18trnmonth) IMPS
(Rs1trnmonth) UPI (Rs230bnmonth) and card transactions (Rs810bnmonth)
growing YoY by 37 82 976 and 13 respectively
Chart 7 NEFT continues on the growth path
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 8 IMPS continues its exponential growth
Source RBI I-Sec Research
Chart 9 UPI continues to grow at a rapid pace
Source RBI I-Sec Research
0
50
100
150
200
250
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-12
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-13
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-15
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-16
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-17
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs tn)
NEFT Value NEFT Volume
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-1
1
Au
g-1
1
Dec-1
1
Ap
r-1
2
Au
g-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ap
r-1
3
Au
g-1
3
Dec-1
3
Ap
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Dec-1
4
Ap
r-1
5
Au
g-1
5
Dec-1
5
Ap
r-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ap
r-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
(Rs b
n)
IMPS Value IMPS Volume
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Ja
n-1
7
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Ju
n-1
7
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Ja
n-1
8
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
Amount (Rs in bn) Volume (mn)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
6
Chart 10 Continuous addition to the member banks on UPI
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 11 Total cards (value) at POS terminals spikeshellip
Chart 12 hellipdue to increase in debit cards usage
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
The average value of a credit card transaction was within the range of Rs3000-3500
after briefly falling to Rs2683 in Decrsquo16 while the same for an average debit card
swipe remains in the range of Rs1300-1500 with a mild downtrend
Chart 13 Average transaction value remains in the normal range
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Feb-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
Ap
r-18
No of Banks live on UPI
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(Rs b
n)
Cards value at POS
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
(rs b
n)
Credit Card Usage at POS
Debit Card usage at POS
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Ap
r-16
May-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Ma
r-17
Ap
r-17
May-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-18
(Rs)
credit card at POS debit card at POS
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
7
RBIrsquos KYC norms puts brakes on the exponential rise of M-Wallets transaction value
M-Wallets transaction value grew exponentially from a pre- demonetisation base of
Rs33bnmonth to Rs130bn in Febrsquo18 but RBIrsquos KYC (Know your Customer) norms post Febrsquo18 have resulted in reversal in the value of M-Wallet transactions which fell to
Rs100bn in Marrsquo18
Chart 14 M-Wallets going out of favour due to KYC norms
Chart 15 M-Wallets - volume
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
Number of POS Cards continue growth ATMs plateau
Significant ramp-up by e-commerce players banks and retail players has resulted in
2590 POS per million persons up from 1250 from the pre-demonetisation period
Credit cards outstanding grew a robust 26 for Q4FY18 and the number outstanding
is 37mn at Marrsquo18-end On the other hand the number of ATMs per million persons
has remained flat at 184 since demonetisation while Paper clearing is seeing a decline
in transactions by value
Chart 16 POS terminals see a demonetisation-induced spike
Source CEIC ISec Research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs b
n)
Value m-Wallet
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Ja
n-1
5
Ju
n-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn)
Volume m-Wallet
150
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Ap
r-15
Jun
-15
Au
g-1
5
Oct-
15
Dec-1
5
Fe
b-1
6
Ap
r-16
Jun
-16
Au
g-1
6
Oct-
16
Dec-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Ap
r-17
Jun
-17
Au
g-1
7
Oct-
17
Dec-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
POS per mn persons (LHS) ATMs per mn persons (RHS)
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
8
Chart 17 Number of cards continues to grow
Source CEIC ISec Research
Chart 18 While paper clearing volumes are stablehellip
Chart 19 hellipits clearly falling in value terms
Source CEIC ISec Research Source CEIC ISec Research
20
24
28
32
36
40
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Ap
r-16
Ma
y-1
6
Jun
-16
Jul-1
6
Au
g-1
6
Se
p-1
6
Oct-
16
Nov-1
6
Dec-1
6
Jan
-17
Fe
b-1
7
Mar-
17
Ap
r-17
Ma
y-1
7
Jun
-17
Jul-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oct-
17
Nov-1
7
Dec-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Mar-
18
(mn)
(mn)
Number of Outstanding Debit Card Number of Outstanding Credit Card (RHS)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Feb-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Mar-
14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Feb-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(mn
)
Paper Clearing Volume
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Fe
b-1
2
Jul-1
2
Dec-1
2
Ma
y-1
3
Oct-
13
Ma
r-14
Au
g-1
4
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Nov-1
5
Ap
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Jul-1
7
Dec-1
7
(Rs t
n) Paper Clearing Value
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
9
Private Banks have edge in electronic transactions but reverse true for ATM networks and cash withdrawals
To contextualise the impact of digital transactions the share of internet and mobile
transactions initiated by customers moved up to 85 in 2018 from 3 in 2008 for
HDFC Bank while during the same period the share of transactions handled by
branches has fallen from 43 to 8
Chart 20 Axis Bank Digital vs Physical
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 21 Axis ndash Bank branch size reduction
Note FY13 average indexed to 100 Source Company data I-Sec research
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Digital ATM+Branch
100
5448
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Till FY13 FY14+FY15 FY16+FY17
Axis Bank Branch area trends
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
10
Chart 22 HDFC Bank Shift to digital in a decade
of customer initiated transactions by channel 2008 vs 2018
Source Company data I-Sec research
Table 2 SBI Share of digital transactions up from 31 in FY17 to 37 in FY18
Channels share of transactions Mar-18 Mar-17
Digital Internet Banking 21 18 POS 13 9 Mobile Banking 3 3 Digital Total 37 31 Other Non-Branch ATMCDM 34 37 Banking Correspondents 9 7 Non-Branch Total 80 75 Branch 20 25 Total 100 100
Source Company data I-Sec research
Chart 23 Growth in personal loans led by Credit Cards and ldquoothersrdquo
Source CEIC I-Sec research
Branches 43
ATM 40
Phone Banking
14
Internet and Mobile 3
2008 Branches 8
ATM 6
Phone Banking
1
Internet and Mobile 85
2018
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
-200
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Housin
g
Ve
hic
le
Ed
ucation
Cre
dit C
ard
OS
Ad
v again
st
Fix
ed
Deposits
Cons D
ura
ble
s
Ad
v again
st
Share
B
onds O
thers
(Rs b
n)
Increase in 1 year Rate of growth
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
11
Overall private sector banks have an edge over PSU banks in electronic mode of
transactions such as credit cards (Pvt bank share ndash including foreign banks 82) and
debit cards (43) usage at POS mobile banking (66) and NEFT outward (51)
transactions On the other hand PSU banks have an edge in terms of cash
transactions in the form of wider ATM networks (PSU share 71) and higher share of
cash withdrawal from ATMs (73)
Chart 24 Mobile Banking Private sector banks lead with a 63 share by value
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 25 Private sector banks have the largest POS network with 59 share
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Volume - mobile transactions (mn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
Jan
-15
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
(Rs b
n)
Value - mobile transactions (Rs bn)
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200000
400000
600000
800000
1000000
1200000
1400000
1600000
1800000
2000000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
Number of POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
12
Chart 26 Credit Cards Private Banks with 64 outstanding cards and 59 of transactions at POS (value terms) are clear leaders
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
5
10
15
20
25
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Outstanding Credit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Ap
r-1
1
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn)
Number of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Jul-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of Usages at POS
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
13
Chart 27 Debit Cards PSU Banks lead in number of cards (PSU share 84) ATM transactions (73 by value) but lag in POS transactions (57 only)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Mar-
13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
Outstanding Debit Cards
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Mar-
12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Mar-
15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
50
100
150
200
250
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Jul-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of usage at POS
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
14
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
Chart 28 While PSU Banks have the largest ATM network they have been reducing the quantum since Aprrsquo17 (71 ATMs as at Marrsquo18)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8
(mn
)
No of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
Ap
r-11
Ju
l-1
1
Nov-1
1
Ma
r-12
Ju
l-1
2
Nov-1
2
Ma
r-13
Ju
l-1
3
Nov-1
3
Ma
r-14
Ju
l-1
4
Nov-1
4
Ma
r-15
Ju
l-1
5
Nov-1
5
Ma
r-16
Ju
l-1
6
Oct-
16
Fe
b-1
7
Jun
-17
Oct-
17
Fe
b-1
8
(Rs b
n)
Value of withdrawals at ATMs
Other PSU Banks a SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
0
10000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
Ap
r-11
Se
p-1
1
Ma
r-12
Se
p-1
2
Ma
r-13
Se
p-1
3
Ma
r-14
Se
p-1
4
Ma
r-15
Se
p-1
5
Ma
r-16
Se
p-1
6
Fe
b-1
7
Au
g-1
7
Fe
b-1
8Number of ATMs
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank
Strategy May 29 2018 ICICI Securities
15
Chart 29 NEFT Private Banks lead with a 37 share as in Aprrsquo18 (value)
Source CEIC RBI I-Sec research
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
Number of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jan
-13
Jun
-13
Dec-1
3
Jun
-14
Dec-1
4
Jun
-15
Dec-1
5
Jun
-16
Dec-1
6
Jun
-17
Dec-1
7
(Rs tn)
Value of NEFT outward transaction
Other PSU Banks SBI amp Associates Pvt bank Foreign Bank
Page 2
SPARK STRATEGY
find SPARK RESEARCH on (SPAK ltgogt)
Uttar Pradesh ndash Breaking free from the shackles of the BIMARU tag
SPARK STRATEGY
22 May 2018
BSE Sensex 34616
NSE Nifty 10516
Performance ()
1m 3m 12m
Sensex -21 02 108
BSE200 06 23 136
We travelled over 1000Kms across the length and breadth of Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days meeting various businesses each day to
gauge the pulse on hat s changing in the state We conclude that UP is breaking free from the shackles of infamous BIMARU tag and is
emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors such as Auto Consumer durables FMCG Retail and NBFCs We believe five epochal
changes in UP in recent years have put the state at a juncture where other developed states like Gujarat TN Maharashtra etc were a decade
ago These changes are 1) Change in law and order situation and the resultant peace dividend 2) Change in road infrastructure 3) Change in
availability of electricity supply 4) Youngest population among major states and 5) Per capita income crossing the $1000 mark an important
threshold which was crossed by other developed states Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka a decade ago These changes should result in
a disproportionate growth for UP heavy businesses over a medium term Most B2C companies are realigning their distribution to ride this
theme ahead From Spark coverage universe recent commentary from Hero Maruti MMFS V-Mart and Britannia are reinvigorating the same
Why Uttar Pradesh matters If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country in the world after China India USA and
Indonesia With 224mn population UP is comparable with Brazil (208mn) and in terms of GDP UP ($219bn) is comparable with Bangladesh
($221bn) With 27 y-o-y growth in motorcycle sales and 23 y-o-y growth in Passenger Vehicles (PVs) during in 9MFY18 UP has emerged the
fastest growing market for Auto companies Moreover UP s share in total motorcycle sales in India has jumped from 15 in FY17 to 17 in
9MFY18 and share of PVs has increased from 73 in FY17 to 84 in 3QFY18 Britannia has posted 152 y-o-y growth in biscuit sales in UP in
FY18 making it one of the fastest growing markets for the company
What is changing in UP There are five major changes which we think are pivotal in putting UP on higher growth trajectory
1 Law and order The state has launched a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12 months As per UP Police 50 most wanted criminals
have died in various encounters in the last 12 months ~4881 criminals have been arrested and ~5500 criminals have applied for bail
cancellation We believe that the peace dividend can have palpable prospective impact on UP
2 Improving road infrastructure After our 1000Km+ road trip in UP we are convinced that UP today has the best road infrastructure in the
country Total state govt spends on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years (FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten
years (Rs 505bn)
3 Improvement in electricity supply Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump from 5hrs of availability in 2012 to 18hrs of
availability in 2018 while it is up 2x in urban areas from 12hrs in 2012 to 22hrs in 2018 Despite electricity demand going up the power deficit has
fallen down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years which is quite low as compared to
the matured states like Kerala (31 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and Karnataka (26 years) Notably adult population (age 10-19
years) comprises of ~25 of total population of Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
5 Increase in per capita income At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago Further in a state where 23 of the GDP is constituted by agriculture Govt focus on doubling far ers income
would lead to improvement in rural cash flows We expect UP s per capita income to grow at a CAGR of 112 from $1006 in FY19 to $1900 by
FY25E resulting in disproportionate growth for durable goods clothing amp footwear entertainment medical products amp services categories
GAUTAM SINGH
gautamsparkcapitalin
+91 22 6176 6804
VIJAYARAGHAVAN SWAMINATHAN
raghavansparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0022
ARJUN N
arjunsparkcapitalin
+91 44 4344 0081
RESEARCH ANALYSTS
-5
0
5
10
15
20
May
-17
Jun
-17
Jul-
17
Au
g-1
7Se
p-1
7O
ct-1
7N
ov-
17
De
c-1
7Ja
n-1
8Fe
b-1
8M
ar-1
8A
pr-
18
May
-18
Sensex BSE 200
Page 3
Ears on the Ground ndash Takeaways from our on road trip in UP
Cash flows in rural UP has improved in last few months led by pick up in non-farm activities and higher realization for
potato and sugarcane farmers Potato price are up ~100 in last two months
1 Improvement in cash
flow situation in rural UP
There is a clear pickup in tractor demand mainly from agriculture construction and haulage segment Labour shortage
and need for replacement for old trucks aided by easy availability of finance are some of the major factors that are
driving tractor sales
2 Sharp pick-up in
demand for Tractors
Hero is the market leader in lt125cc bike category however in the higher cc segment craze for Enfield is on the rise
Improving affordability is one of the key reasons driving the sales of premium segment bikes
3 Two Wheelers
demand on the rise
There was a massive demand for HCVs in UP mainly led by Infra spend until Ma 18 However Govt in Ap 18 had
relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand shifting towards lower tonnage trucks 4 MHCV sales
GST had its impact on the business while it is on a recovery mode now The frenzy for Patanjali products has come
down in non-medicine products now V-Mart has been doing very well in this region 5 FMCG and retail
Inverter ACs are gaining huge acceptance due to power saving feature as it saves upto 50 electricity Frequent
fluctuations in electricity makes stabilizer a must in this region 6 Consumer Durables
With Ultratech coming into this market there has been major thrust on full capacity utilization Cement demand is
good but prices have remained very weak this year Sand prices have now fallen 15-20 due to availability of mines
7 Cement demand has
picked up but price
remains the key concern
Despite so much infra development real estate prices are still muted Potential buyers want to wait for further
correction in prices
8 Muted demand for
building materials real
estate remains very week
Page 4
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
1 If Uttar Pradesh were a country it would be comparable with Brazil in population and with Bangladesh in GDP
Parameters Uttar Pradesh All States
GDP size ($bn) 219 2577
Share in Indias GDP () 9 100
Per capita GDP ($) 1006 1975
Total population (mn) 224 1282
Population density (personssq km) 829 382
Sex ratio (females per 1000 males) 912 940
Literacy rate () 677 730
Installed power capacity (MW) 24434 334161
National highway length (km) 9017 122432
FDI equity inflows ($ mn) 652 367900
PPP projects (No) 537 9068
SEZ (No) 12 222
Capital Lucknow -
No of districts 71 662
1 If UP were a separate country it would be the 5th most populous country 2 Every country in Africa Europe and South America has fewer people than UP
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
3 In terms of GDP UP is comparable with Bangladesh
Source World Bank Spark Capital Research
4 Key Statistics UP vs all states
Source GoI Economic Survey Spark Capital Research
2970 2965 2955 2825 2789 2470 2387
2214 2190
Sin
ga
po
re
Mal
ays
ia
Sou
th A
fric
a
Co
lom
bia
Pa
kist
an
Ch
ile
Fin
lan
d
Ba
ngl
ad
esh UP
GDP ($ bn)
Countries less populous than UP
USA China USA China
India Indonesia
1370 1282
323 261 224 208 193 186
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
China India United
States
Indonesia UP Brazil Pakistan Nigeria
Population (mn)
In terms of population
UP is marginally bigger
than Brazil
Page 5
UP has emerged as the fastest growing market for two wheelers whereas rich
states TN Karnataka and Maharashtra are witnessing fatigue in demand
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
UP s sha e i total Moto le sales i I dia has also ju ped f o i FY to 17 during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
For passenger vehicles also UP has seen the highest growth during 9MFY18
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
Britannia has posted 152 yoy growth in biscuit sales in UP in FY18 making it one
of the fastest growing markets for the company
Source Company presentation Spark Capital Research
A) Why Uttar Pradesh matters
27 26 25 23 22 21
18
10 10 9
6 6 5
1 1
-6 -7
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ori
ssa
MP
Bih
ar
Ass
am
Jha
rkh
an
d
All
Sta
tes
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
Ra
jast
ha
n
Ke
rala
WB
Pu
nja
b
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
Motorcycle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
23 22 20 19 17 16
15 14 11 11
8 7
4
-4
-8 -11
UP
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
Bih
ar
Ch
att
isg
arh
Gu
jara
t
WN
Ra
jast
ha
n
Pu
nja
b
Ass
am
Ke
rala
All
Sta
tes
Ta
mil
Na
du
De
lhi
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ka
rna
tak
a
Passenger vehicle sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy)
13 15
17
12
9
5
5
9 6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 H1FY15 FY16 FY17 9MY18
Share in total Motorcycle sales in India ()
UP Maharashtra Karnataka TN
2 UP is emerging as a major demand driver for many sectors like Auto FMCG Retail etc indicating a palpable surge in consumer demand in UP
94
156
263
93
127
228
152 146 16
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
UP MP Gujarat
Britannias sales growth ( yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18
Page 6
1 UP govt has opted for a massive crackdown on criminals in the last 12-months
Source Dainik Jagran Spark Capital Research
2 Around 5000 criminals have been arrested and 5500 have applied for bail
cancelation in last one year
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
3 Local people told us that there has been a significant change in intensity of
vigilance in most of the places in the last few months
Source Media reports Spark Capital Research
4 Mobile police patrolling (100 number) has been the most effective in
controlling crimes
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Law and order UP which is notorious for its poor Law amp Order situation has launched a assi e a kdo o i i alshellip
Withi te i utes of call we aim to
reach the doorstep
of the caller in
trou le
Stri t i stru tio s are there from the
top to control not
only crime but to
strop any form of
extortion eve
teasi g et
50 wanted criminals are dead
4881 criminals arrested
5500 criminals applied for bail
cancelation
A big rise in surrendering
50 most wanted criminals have died in various
encounters in last 12 months
4881 criminals have been arrested from the state
Around 5500 criminals have applied for bail cancellation
in last 12 months as they fear police encounter outside
jail
A large number of criminals are either surrendering or
have fled to neighbouring states
The police has launched Ope atio
Clea in Uttar Pradesh to deal with the wanted criminals
Page 7
1 Winds of change We noted a toll plaza on inner ring road Agra that is now fully
operated by only women employees ndash a completely unthinkable deed in old UP
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Winds of change Jaswant Prajapati a food vendor in Lucknow o does t have to pay Rs 600 weekly bribe to cops a saving of Rs 2400 per month
Source Spark Capital Research
3 Sri Lankan economy witnessed a sharp rebound post the decisive end of the
civil war in May 2009
Source IMF Spark Capital Research
4 Night traffic and economic activities have increased - Takeaways from our
interaction with Sateesh Kumar a taxi driver in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipthe pea e di ide d o its e o o a e e u de stood f o S i La ka s Pea e Di ide d
Jaswant Prajapati who is a food vendor in Lucknow
He earns ~Rs 1200 per day and saves half of it Overall activities have picked up as many new offices five star hotels etc have opened up re e tl
i Never took any travel booking involving night travel in UP until recently
because of fear of car being stolen or loot on the way
ii Rise in night traffic in UP in last 6 months because the UP 100 mobile police
patrolling has been very active at night
iii Every 10 Km he sees a police patrol car UP 100 which has brought down
criminal activities
iv He has started taking overnight bookings in UP His cashflow has improved
by 20 in last few months
v Have bought one more car on finance and put it in Orix
35
80
91
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
Real GDP growth () Sri Lanka
The Peace Dividend example from Sri Lanka
Page 8
2 A sea change in road infra UP now has the best road infrastructure in the country
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Total state Govt spend on roads amp bridges at Rs 708bn in the last four years
(FY14-FY17) is 14x the combined spend in the previous ten years
Source RBI Spark Capital Research
UP s oads ha e see the iggest t a sfo atio i the ou t i the last three years both in urban and rural areas
Source Spark Capital Research
Source SIAM Spark Capital Research
3 MHCV sales in UP have seen massive jump during 9MFY18 4 Takeaways from our interaction with leading CV financer in UP
Source Spark Capital Research
16
39 56 57 63 56 63 64
85
131
169 188
220
-
50
100
150
200
250
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
UP Govt spend on road amp bridges (RS bn)
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY14-FY17= Rs 708bn
Spend on roads amp bridges in FY04-FY13 = Rs 505bn
Total spend in last 4 yrs = 14x the combined spend in
the previous ten years
85
55
33 28 27 27
21 20 17 14 10 5 1 0
-2 -9
-16
UP
Ch
att
isg
arh
Ra
jast
ha
n
Jha
rkh
an
d
Ori
ssa
MP
Pu
nja
b
All
Sta
tes
Ma
ha
rash
tra
Ass
am
WB
Ke
rala
Bih
ar
Ka
rna
tak
a
TN
De
lhi
Gu
jara
t
MHCV sales during 9MFY18 ( yoy) i There as a sharp ju p i de a d for MHCVs i UP duri g Apr -Mar
mainly led by infra spend by Govt
ii Strict laws against overloading and high infra demand led to the pick up in
demand for CVs Govt relaxed the overloading limit in UP leading to demand
tapering off for higher tonnage CVs and down trading to lower tonnage
iii Tata Motors Ashok Leyland Bharat Benz and Eicher motors (in this order) are
the leading players in MHCV market with Tata Motors being the leader with
50+ market share Tata Motors has lost market share in this region
iv Ashok Leyland has been very aggressive in this market during last year and it
has gained market share from 24 a year ago to 37 now
Agra-Lucknow expressway is the
longest expressway in India
Even rural areas now are well connected
with nearby cities through good roads
Page 9
3 Electricity availability in rural areas has seen three-fold jump while it is up 2x in urban areas vs 2012
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
1 Sharp improvement in availability of electricity in last 2 years
Source Spark Capital Research
2 Energy deficit has tapered down to 2 in FY17 down from 22 in FY10
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
76 76 81 92 95
103 106
107
59 65 72 76 82 87
93
106
22
15
11
17
14 16
13
2
0
5
10
15
20
25
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17
Energy Required (BU) Energy availability (BU) Energy Deficit ()
3 State Go t ai s to p o ide po e suppl Ma Huge sa i gs fo industries and small establishments
Source Spark Capital Research
What people said on power supply and electricity tariff hikes
Source Spark Capital Research
i Most cities have been receiving ~22 hours
a day power supply
ii Demand for inverter and battery has
taken a massive hit because of enhanced
electricity supply
iii Electricity tariffs have been increased
around 3x for un-metered connections
for non-agriculture use
iv Rural people were complaining about
the surge in electricity price
5
10
18
12
18
22
0
5
10
15
20
25
2012 2015 2018
Number of hours availability of electricity in UP
Rural areas Urban areas
1 Enhanced power supply UP which used to have prolonged power
outages has seen a remarkable improvement in last couple of years This
should help saving for industrialists and households spending on power
gensets inverters batteries etc
2 Crackdown on power thefts Vigilance teams have been added frequent
raids on power thieves replacing traditional meters with smart meters are
the key measures the State Govt has taken to stop power thefts
3 Bodes well for demand for meters transformers cables and durable
goods Negative for genset inverter and battery industries
Page 10
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
4 Demographic dividend UP has the youngest population among major states with median age of 20 years
Inter-state median age comparison of India
Source Census 2011
A
1) Median age of Uttar Pradesh is the lowest in India at 20 which is
quite low as compared to the matured states like Kerala (31 years)
Goa (30 years) Tamil Nadu (29 years) Andhra (27 years) and
Karnataka (26 years)
2) Proportion of population with age group (10-19 years) at ~25~ is
the highest in India among major states
3) UP has the lowest share of elderly population (60 years or more)
(77) among major states
4) UP is set to reap the benefits of its young population ahead
Age group between 10-19 years account for ~25 of total population of
Uttar Pradesh which is the highest among major States
Source Census 2011 A
Name of the State Adolescent Name of the State Adolescent
Top 5 Bottom 5
UTTAR PRADESH 245 KERALA 163
RAJASTHAN 229 TAMIL NADU 172
UTTARAKHAND 225 KARNATAKA 189
BIHAR 225 MAHARASHTRA 19
JHARKHAND 222 ANDHRA PRADESH 193
Page 11
UP has crossed the $1000 per capita income mark this year which is very important
for discretionary consumption India crossed the $1000 mark a decade ago in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
The richer states - Gujarat and Maharashtra crossed the $1000 per capita mark in
FY06 Tamil Nadu did it in FY07 and Karnataka crossed this mark in FY08
Source GoI RBI Spark Capital Research
Agriculture accounts for 23 of the state GDP Centre Govt focus on doubling
fa e s i o e ould ha e a di e t i pa t o the state s u al e o o
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
Rural cash flow has improved ndash takeaways from interactions with farmers in UP
Source GoI Spark Capital Research
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
5 At $1000 per capita income UP has reached an important threshold where Gujarat Maharashtra TN and Karnataka were a decade agohellip
1061
1960
1006
500
700
900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
FY
05
FY
06
FY
07
FY
08
FY
09
FY
10
FY
11
FY
12
FY
13
FY
14
FY
15
FY
16
FY
17
FY
18
India UP (T+11Yrs)
In terms of per capita GDP UP is
following India with a decade lag
1049
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
FY05 FY06 FY07 FY08 FY09 FY10 FY11 FY12 FY13 FY14 FY15 FY16 FY17 FY18
Gujarat Karnataka Maharashtra Tamil Nadu
Uttar Pradesh is where Gujarat
Maharashtra TN and
Karnataka were a decade ago
Agri 23
Industry 26
Services 51
i Cash flow in rural area has increased in recent months in sugarcanepotato
belts
ii Pick up in non-farm activities in rural areas have also resulted in better cash
flow for rural people Wage rate has been on the rise
iii This season potato prices are higher (up around 100 in last one month) due
to lo er produ tio This ear far ers realizatio has go e up
iv Farmers are complaining about highly volatile prices of agri commodities
They want assured prices so that they can be sure of future income
v Sugarcane output has been higher this year due to ~20 higher output
leading to fall in sugar prices
Page 12
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
hellipfu the ise i UP s pe apita i o e to $ FY E ould ea ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea entertainment amp
medical and HH products amp services categories
As per- apita i o e g o s p opo tio of food i o e all HH spe d o es do hellip
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
hellipa d p opo tio of o -food categories like durables goods clothing amp footwear
and other HH products amp services goes up
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
We estimate rise in per capita income in UP from current $1000 to $1900 by
hellip
Source CSO Spark Capital Research
hellip hi h should esult i ig de a d delta fo du a le goods lothi g amp foot ea Education entertainment amp medical and HH products amp services
Source NSSO Spark Capital Research
585 532 481 465 430
415 468 519 535 570
1993-94 1999-00 2004-05 2009-10 2011-12
Share in HH expenditure in India ()
Food Non-food
111 121 38 62 50
70
198 214
21 19 100 83
481 430
2004-05 2011-12
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in India () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp
medical
145 162
43 74 72 95
160
178 20
17 81
61
480 413
2011-12 2024-25E
Key category-wise share in HH expenditure in UP () Food
Fuel amp light
Tobacco amp intoxicants
HH products amp services
Clothing amp footwear
Durable goods
Education entertainment amp medical
325
749
1006
1900
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
FY0
5
FY0
6
FY0
7
FY0
8
FY0
9
FY1
0
FY1
1
FY1
2
FY1
3
FY1
4
FY1
5
FY1
6
FY1
7
FY1
8
FY1
9
FY2
0
FY2
1
FY2
2
FY2
3
FY2
4
FY2
5
Per capita GDP of Uttar Pradesh ($) Estimate
Page 13
B) What is changing in Uttar Pradesh
Earlier (until FY15) Now
Power
Supply
Law and
order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Power
Supply
Law and
Order
Road
Infra
GDP
Growth
Income per
capita
Services
sector
Demography
Dependency on
Agriculture
Positive
Negative
Neutral
Uttar Pradesh Then amp Now
Page 14
C) Ears on the Ground ndash Takea a s f o ou oad t ip i UP i Ap
The Spark strategy team traversed more than 1000 kms across the length and breadth
of the Uttar Pradesh over a period of 7 days doing varied channel checks each day to
judge the general demand scenario
Spark Ears on the Ground Juggernaut
1000 kms + 200 plus channel checks in urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh
Our channel checks included
bull Apparels shops
bull Auto amp Auto ancs dealers
bull Bank amp NBFC branches
bull Bureaucrats Media generalists
bull Cement dealers tiles amp building materials
bull Construction sites
bull Consumer durable outlets
bull Four wheeler dealers
bull Farmers labourers
bull Pharmacy
bull Real estate developers agents etc
bull Regional sales-head wholesalers
bull Toll plazas luxury stores
bull Truck operators
bull Two wheeler dealers
Visited more than 50 major urban and rural pockets of Uttar Pradesh with
an objective to understand the current demand scenario and to identify
emerging trends
500+ touch points across key urban and rural pockets of UP were covered
Agra
Lucknow
Delhi
Shamli
Saharanpur
Meerut
Ghaziabad
Noida
Kanpur
Unnao
Barabanki
Etawah
Hathras
Page 30
Fiscal deficit and debt management
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Market borrowings to jump 224 yoy to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
1 Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain largely unchanged at 296 of GDP
in FY9BE within the FRBM limit
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
2 Market borrowings has been budgeted to increase by 224 in FY19
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
3 Interest servicing as a of expenditure has been budgeted to fall to 76 of
total expenditure in FY19BE
4 Govt aims to gradually reduce outstanding debt which stood at 298 of GDP
in FY18RE
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
745 677 575 549 671
68 54
-150
40
224
-02
-02
-01
-01
00
01
01
02
02
03
-
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Market borrowings (Rs bn) Market borrowings ( of GDP)
300 299
295
298
291
286
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
302
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Outstanding debt ( of GDP)
53
450
295 298 296
00
10
20
30
40
50
60
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Fiscal Deficit ( of GDP)
93
81 86
82 76
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Interest Servicing ( total expenditure)
Page 31
Appendix UP Budget FY19 Key takeaways
Fiscal deficit
Total
Expenditure
Market
Borrowings
Shortfall in
own tax
revenue
Fall in stamp
duty
Subsidies GDP
Rural
Spend
Pension
Capex vs
Revex
Urban Infra
Irrigation
Fiscal deficit has been budgeted to remain
largely unchanged at 296 of GDP in FY9BE
within the FRBM limit
The total expenditure in FY19 is
targeted at Rs 43tn This is
163 higher than FY18RE
Market borrowings has been
budgeted to increase by 224
to Rs 671bn in FY19BE
UP witnessed a 15 fall in tax
revenue collections during
FY18 over the budget
estimates
Collections from stamp duty were
28 lower than the budget
estimates
UP is expected to spend Rs 116bn on subsidies
in FY19BE which is 15 higher than FY18BE
Spending in irrigation has increased 316 in
FY19BE over FY18RE to Rs 142bn
Rs 165bn has been allocated for
the Smart Cities Mission
Capex is budgeted to increase
by 305 in FY19 while revex is
budgeted to increase at a
moderate pace of 122
Out of Rs 197bn allocated for rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent
on roads and bridges and Rs 12bn
will be spent on housing
The nominal GDP of UP for FY19 has been
estimated to grow only at 8 yoy to Rs149tn
The state is estimated to spend Rs
455bn on pensions a 22 increase
over FY18
Page 32
Sectoral Spending ndash Major heads
Appendix Energy irrigation and rural development grab the maximum delta in spending in FY19BE
Department-wise expenditure
Source UP Budget Spark Capital Research
Key Highlights
bull The allocations for agriculture sector has
fallen 59 yoy in FY19BE because the
state had implemented a farm loan waiver
in FY18 resulting in higher spending
during the year
bull Out of the Rs 197bn allocated to Rural
development Rs 29bn will be spent on
roads and bridges and Rs 12bn will be
spent on rural housing
bull While allocation for energy sector has
seen 537 yoy jump 62 of this
allocation is for revenue expenses (such as
payment of interests and subsidy) and
only 38 is on capital expenses
bull Rs 165bn has been allocated for the
Smart Cities Mission Cities selected under
the Mission are Lucknow Kanpur Agra
Varanasi Allahabad Aligarh Jhansi
Moradabad Bareli and Saharanpur
bull Allocation for various road projects
Gorakhpur Link Expressway Rs 55bn
Purvanchal Expressway Rs 10bn Agra-
Lucknow Expressway Rs 5bn
Expenditure (Rs bn) Growth (yoy)
FY16 FY17 FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE FY18BE FY18RE FY19BE
Agriculture 29 60 396 284 116 5547 3695 -592
Rural development 101 104 158 159 197 516 528 237
Irrigation and Flood Control 103 107 110 109 143 26 16 316
Energy 482 340 177 181 278 -478 -468 537
Education 401 490 624 570 632 272 163 109
Public Works 45 237 192 195 222 -190 -178 138
Urban Development 52 62 134 131 135 1146 1107 26
Debt Repayment 176 203 220 220 305 84 84 388
Interest payment 284 269 332 303 324 233 124 71
Others 1406 217 225 225 278 36 37 236
Total Expenditure 3039 3334 3847 3685 4284 154 105 163
1 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Eleven months post GST implementation we revisit our long-term thesis
of formalisation of the Indian economy (refer THE SHIFT Unorganised to
organised) An integrated tax structure and anti-evasion measures under
GST (e-way bill reverse charge mechanism (RCM) bilateral validation of
invoices among critical ones) are core to our thesis of demand shift from
unorganised to organised players for certain sectors While timelines for
implementation of RCM and bilateral invoice validation are unclear inter-
state e-way bill was implemented from April 1 2018 (intra-state from
June 01 2018) Our on-ground interactions with trade
(dealerdistributors) industry bodies and experts highlight 1) in the
immediate period post GST rollout unorganised trade ruled the roost due
to lack of anti-evasion measures 2) e-way bill has been widely accepted
across informal trade despite below-par surveillance and 3) organised
players have regained some lost ground though acceleration in shift of
demand to organised players hinges on strict surveillance and rollout of
all anti-evasion measures While jewellery battery and plastic products
sectors have seen demand shift post GST the organised building material
(tiles plywood) sector has faced challenges from informal trade
GST collections Tough ask anti-evasion measures critical
Aggregate FY18 GST collection stood at ~72tn (monthly ~INR900bn) While collections
were strong in the first three months they tapered off post October 2017 before
touching an all-time high monthly collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than monthly
run rate till March 2018) in April 2018 The government has set an aggressive GST
collection target for FY19 implying a monthly run rate of INR1165bn (30 higher than
FY18) We believe it will be a tough task ahead in terms of GST collectionsrsquo trajectory
and will hinge on strict implementation of anti-evasion measures and surveillance
Unorganised trade losing ground post e-way bill though early days
Our interactions with dealers distributors industry bodies transporters and
unorganised manufacturers indicate that unorganised trade activity has reduced post e-
way bill implementation A few indicated there is a visible change in attitude of trade
channels towards compliance as incentives to trade via informal channels have
reduced considerably Some believe the e-way bill will lead to improved compliance
though strict suvelliance by the government has yet to kick in
Multiple challenges lurk around surveillance
Despite smooth roll out of e-way bill there are multiple challenges that lurk in terms of
a) liberal validity of e-way bills leading to instances of multiple use of the same e-way
bill b) on-ground checks inspection by officials yet to pick up c) lack of fear amongst
trade channel regarding non-compliance and d) under-invoicing which remains a
widely prevalent modality to evade taxes amongst informal trade though its magnitude
has reduced since GST implementation
Manoj Bahety
+91 22 6623 3362
manojbahetyedelweissfincom
Nilesh Aiya
+91 22 4040 7575
nileshaiyaedelweissfincom
Ankit Dangayach
+91 22 6620 3077
ankitdangayachedelweissfincom
Raj Koradia
+91 22 6623 3422
rajkoradiaedelweissfincom
June 4 2018
THE SHIFT
ANALYSIS BEYOND CONSENSUS
EDEL PULSE
THE SHIFT 11 months of GST ndash Strict surveillance critical
2 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Roll out of e-way bill smooth this far with no technical glitches
State-wise phased implementation had led to smooth roll-out of e-way bill with no major
systems related issues observed in the initial months e-way bill has gained wide acceptance
across different industries and geographies However intensity of surveillance of e-way bills
differs from state to state Some challenges faced by tax payers include part truck load and
related compliance issues confusion in case of transhipment goods moved in multiple
trucks and inability of transporters to comply with norms among others
GST collections tapered down after initial pick-up
Chart 1 May GST Collections promising ndash however ask rate is higher
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
Aggregate GST collection for FY18 (8 months - August17-March18) stood at ~INR72tn
implying average monthly collection of ~INR897bn While collection was strong in the first
three months it tapered off post Octoberrsquo17 before touching an all-time high monthly
collection of INR1035bn (19 higher than Novrsquo17-Marrsquo18 average collections) in Aprilrsquo18
The government has stated that the spurt in April GST collection may have been a year-end
phenomenon and its sustainability in subsequent months needs to be monitored
Collections data released for the month of May stood at ~INR940bn which is promising
though the asking rate is higher and it will be challenging for the Government to meet the
collection target
We believe the fall in GST collections during November 2017-March 2018 was primarily led
by
1 Significant destocking of inventory across the distribution chain in the period leading to
GST implementation Post GST rollout restocking took place at a brisk pace leading to
high collections in Aug-Octrsquo18
2 Reduction in tax rates from 28 to 18 on 178 items with effect from November 15
2017
3 Deferment of implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill bilateral
validation of invoices and RCM
936 930 951859 837
889 880 893
1035940
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
Au
g-1
7
Se
p-1
7
Oc
t-1
7
No
v-1
7
De
c-1
7
Jan
-18
Fe
b-1
8
Ma
r-1
8
Ap
r-1
8
Ma
y-1
8
(IN
R b
n)
Monthly GST Collection
897987
1201
0
300
600
900
1200
1500
Avg (2017-18) Avg (April-
May18)
FY19 avg
monthly asking
rate
(IN
R b
n)
GST Collection - Asking rate
3 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Chart 2 Compliance under composition scheme picking up ndash Primarily includes the small tax payers
Source Ministry of Finance Edelweiss research
GST collections target for FY19 a tough ask
The governmentrsquos FY19 budgeted GST collection implies average monthly collection of
INR1165bn (up ~30 over FY18 monthly collection) After considering April-May aggregate
GST collections of ~INR2tn the ask rate for FY19 has gone up to ~INR12tn per month The
government is hopeful of gradual recovery in GST collections led by pick up of economic
activity and implementation of anti-evasion measures like e-way bill which was
implemented from April 1 2018 on inter-state transactions Further intra-state e-way bill
also implemented from June 01 2018 across India We believe there are strong levers with
the government to curb tax evasion which will lead to higher compliance increased tax
collection over long term and formalisation will benefit sectors with huge unorganised
presence
810
925
1147
0
250
500
750
1000
1250
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(0
00
s)
Quarterly returns filed
34
42
58
00
15
30
45
60
75
June-Sept 17 Oct-Dec 17 Jan-March 18
(IN
R b
n)
Tax collected
4 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Pulse on the ground
Table 1 E-way Bill Key highlights from our channel check
Source Edelweiss research
Roll out and implementation Smooth roll out has happened and no major system related issues glitches faced by trade
Phased inter-state implementation and intra-state roll out helped ease the pressure on
system servers
Implementation was planned better this time around
Anecdotal evidence suggests that transporters are reluctant to transport goods in the
absence of an e-way Bill Freight rates for movement of goods without proper documents
(including e-way Bil l) have gone up considerably
Surveillance and checks On-ground checking inspection by officials has yet to pick up substantially currently it is
happening in a calibrated and gradual way to curb unauthorised movement of inter-state
goods Some believe that tight surveil lance could improve tax collection and reduce unorganised
unauthorised trade going ahead RFID (refer Annexure 2) based checking could improve the governmentrsquos abil ity to monitor
inspect higher number of vehicles versus physical verification by officials
Challenges Difficulty in preparing shipments in advance due to validity of e-way bil ls In case of part
truck load shipment inabil ity to ensure full compliance as transported deals with further
movement of goods Involvement of multiple vehicles trans-shipment cases involve recording details of each
vehicle which is difficult for the suppliers to maintain There are no controls on how
transporters are complying on behalf of tax payers
An e-way bil l cannot be edited Hence in case of errors have to be cancelled and a new one
needs to be generated
Huge working capital issues are being faced by the SMEs due to stuck GST refunds increased
compliance cost and working capital financing issues
Unorganised trade situation Unorganised players gained ground in the post GST and pre e-way Bil l period due to lack of
anti-evasion measures However visible difference has been observed post e-way Bil l
implementation Currently therersquos no fear amongst the trade community and a casual approach is being
adopted in terms of full compliance
Under-invoicing a prevalent practise continues unabated even after e-way bil l
implementation Tax evasion tactics like under-invoicing will be difficult for the government
to track Cash availabil ity in the system has increased as lucrative working capital terms offered to
deal in cash (fast receivable collection) is incentivising cash dealings However since the implementation of e-way Bil l freight rates have increased for those who
dispatch goods without proper documentation signall ing visible additional cost burden to
transact in cash
5 Edelweiss Securities Limited
The SHIFT
Glimpse of surveillance measures and levers to increase compliance
Fig 1 Recent surveillance measures
Source Media articles Edelweiss research
Government has set up a dedicated GST Intelligence unit
Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI) is tasked with ensuring tax compliance and
going further it is expected to step up surveillance by studying the price structure
marketing patterns and classification of commodities and advise the GST authorities in
plugging loopholes and ensure compliance
About DGSTI
The government has set up a new unit mdash Directorate General of GST Intelligence (DGSTI)
which is empowered to keep an eye on tax compliance as part of its plans to crackdown on
evaders and invoke anti-profiteering measures There will be at least one unit of DGSTI in
each state which will replace the existing Directorate General of Central Excise Intelligence
(DGCEI)
DGSTI will be mandated to collect and disseminate intelligence relating to GST evasion It
will study the price structure marketing patterns and classification of commodities and
advise the GST authorities in plugging loopholes It will also function as think-tank to Central
Board of Indirect Taxes amp Customs (CBIC) The body will examine cases of suspected tax
evasion and pass on its inputs to CBIC DGSTI will also study the modus-operandi of evasion
and issuance of alert notices and co-ordinate and share information about tax evasion with
other enforcement agencies
Intelligence Unit unearths fake bills worth INR 25 bn claiming fake ITC of INR 45bn
CGST- Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC worth INR 723 mn
Intelligence team-Mumbai arrests 2 people for claiming fake ITC of INR 12 bn
Department is sending notices through automated mails to non-filers through emails asking them to submit returns within three days of the expiry of the deadline
GST officers sending scrutiny notices to companies whose tax payment did not match the GSTR-1 (Sales Return) and whose GSTR-1 did not match GSTR-2A (Purchase return)
As per analysis in March 34 per cent of businesses paid INR 344 bn less tax between July-December
Department initiated the
mobile checking of
vehicles transporting
goods in Madhya Pradesh
and so far about 100
vehicles have been
detained for violating e-
way bill norms
6 Edelweiss Securities Limited
Analysis Beyond Consensus
Fig 2 Anti-evasion measures and potential levers to up the compliance going ahead
Source Edelweiss research
GSTN has invited bids from private entities for 360-degree profiling of taxpayers for early detection of fraud as it seeks to transform into an end-to-end platform for checking GST evasion from being just a tax collection portal
QR code on the e-way Bill would help easier and faster verification by tax officers
Installation of RFIDs by notified transporters and RFID readers at key locations would aid in tracking the movement goods without stopping the vehicle on the road
RCM is expected to be implemented soon wherein recipient of the goods andor services is liable to pay GST instead of the supplier
This will encourage trade with registered dealers and help in improving tax compliance
Invoice matching would done by way of auto-population of data filed in GSTR 1 of the supplier into GSTR 2 of the buyer and input tax credit on purchase of goods would only be available on matching of details in GSTR 1 and GSTR 2
Invoice matching
Reverse charge
mechanism (RCM)
AnalyticsQR code amp
RFID
Cheap data driving profound changes
The collapse in data prices hurts the telecom industry but is transformative for the economy
adding 5 to GDP Neelkanth Mishra
As a proportion of per capita income data on Indian mobile networks has gone from being
the most expensive globally two years ago to being the cheapest having fallen 95 per
cent Such steep price declines affect habits and behaviour We at Credit Suisse embarked on a
study to understand the economic implications of this change
Understandably during this period there has been a dramatic surge in data consumption with
per capita monthly usage rising eight-fold to nearly six and a half gigabytes Indian mobile
networks now claim that they carry more data than several global telecommunication companies
combined While some pride is justifiable for these firms per capita data usage in India is still a
small fraction of what it is in developed markets and may remain so for the foreseeable future
This is because most data consumption globally is through fixed line networks where India has
made very little progress In many countries per capita mobile data consumption is less than half
of Indiarsquos but total data consumed is fifteen times as much
Instead the exciting change is in the number of people who can now use mobile
broadband without worrying about how much data they are consuming We estimate that by
2020 there will be 550 million Indians with datavideo-capable phones from just 200 million at the
end of 2016 Each such user is a consumer as well as a worker mdash let us look at both the facets
Five years ago we wrote about the ldquoSilent Transformationrdquo of India on how the spread of rural
roads electricity and phones was driving never-before-seen changes to productivity During a
discussion on this report with the board of a large consumer goods company the CEO asked
ldquoExciting changes but how do we build our brands with the families benefiting from these
changes They donrsquot watch TVrdquo
That is indeed a significant constraint Indiarsquos TV penetration has improved significantly in the
last decade or so but a third of the households still do not have access For the ones that
do 95 per cent have only one TV (as against the US average of three screens per household)
and minutes of TV viewing per capita in India are among the lowest in the world
Cheap video-capable phones help If each user watches one to two hours of video on the phone
it adds 550 million to 11 billion screen hours per day to the 1 billion screen hours of capacity
currently available through televisions We estimate that the share of rural consumption that
can be targeted by video advertising may jump from just 27 per cent to over 95 per cent
Not only does the reach widen but smaller advertisers can reach more niche audiences too One
can run an advertising campaign targeting only a few thousand users now instead of relying on
mass media advertising that has very large ticket-sizes for advertising spots The cost of
advertising should fall as well mdash the surge in volumes on some of the internet platforms has
brought down the cost per impression by three-fourths in the last two years Thus branding
reach broadens sharpens and also becomes cheaper
A far more significant impact is likely to come from the share of Indiarsquos workforce that is connected rising from 33 per cent in 2016 to 96 per cent in 2020 Of the myriad ways in
which this helps productivity let us discuss three
The first is a significant improvement in worker utilisation While friction in job markets
(inefficiencies in matching a job opening to a worker) is a universal challenge in India the
problem is amplified by tens of millions of workers doing multiple jobs every year Workforce size
and the unemployment rate depend on the question asked Whether there was work in the
previous six months (unemployment ratio 22 per cent 474 million workers) or if there was work
in the previous week (56 per cent 416 million) Social media on which Indians collectively
spent 71 billion hours last year may be a drag on productivity for some (including this
author) but can significantly increase the number of days worked in a year for many by
expanding the network of trust The Nobel laureate Daniel Kahneman writes of a study that
showed how repetitive exposure builds trust Social media plays this role improving the
functioning of informal employment networks
The second is on supply chain efficiencies Indiarsquos inventory-to-GDP ratio is the highest in
the world That is to generate the same amount of income there is a lot more of capital stuck in
idle inventories than is necessary The fragmented nature of Indiarsquos retail chain and the surfeit of
small manufacturers compound the problems of an inefficient transportation infrastructure
Connected supply chains can improve planning and can release capital that can be
reinvested for growth Further in sectors like packaged food that have short shelf-lives data
connectivity is critical for business feasibility The reason every locality in India has a bakery
but there are no national chains is that in fast expiring products like cream rolls the supply chain
information could only travel efficiently in a radius of a few kilometres
The third and the largest impact would be through services networks that bring down fixed
costs by improving utilisation If a car costing Rs 700000 runs 50000 kilometres in say 7
years (at 20 kilometres a day) just the capital cost is fourteen rupees a
kilometre However if a taxi driver in a second hand car purchased for Rs 300000 drives
150000 kilometres the capital cost falls to two rupees a kilometre improving
affordability If taxi drivers and users are connected this helps create jobs and also
provides more affordable transportation This same mechanism applies to hotels as well
as skilled professionals such as beauticians electricians and plumbers among others
These are early days and human ingenuity and Indian entrepreneurism can significantly amplify
the positive impact But we estimate just these three mechanisms can add nearly 5 per cent to
GDP If these play out over three years that means 15 per cent a year addition to GDP growth
12 per cent a year if over four years The government and the private sector have invested
nearly 2 per cent of GDP in telecom infrastructure in the last four years Even if the decline
in data prices has been painful for the telecom industry the benefits to the economy seem
significant
The writer is India Equity Strategist for Credit Suisse
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 113
Story of the dayUnlike In The Past Where EMs Magnified US Market Swings They Face Less Downside Risk Now
Illustration Kishore Das
Perspective
The Value Of
lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks
What should be your reactionto the success of investors who
buy and hold seeminglyovervalued stocks
Rohit Chauhan
Home Perspective The Value Of lsquoOvervaluedrsquo Stocks | JUN 01 2018
There is obviously no single way of making money in the stock market There are short term
traders buy and hold guys debt specialists and all kinds of people in-between Each
approach has its strengths and weaknesses and no one can claim that a specific approach is
inherently superior to the other unless they are equally proficient in both
I have come to realise that the most important factor to long term success is to understand
which approach suits your temperament
The value of learning
Some of you who have followed me on my blog would have noticed that I try not be
dogmatic about any specific style I have tried multiple approaches and continue to do so I
do have a dominant style which suits my temperament mdash buy decent quality companies and
SIGN IN SUBSCRIBE
Outlook Traveller Business Money Images Hindi
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 213
hold them for the long run but I have tried deep value arbitrage options and all other types
of investing
Most of my experiments have been failures (see here and here) from a monetary
perspective but they have deepened my understanding on what works and does not work
for me
A valid question would be why bother Why not find an approach which works for you and
then just stick with it (and maybe even publicly defend it as your faith)
Letrsquos consider an analogy Letrsquos say you are a sculptor who likes to make figures using wood
stone and other materials Letrsquos assume you are exceptionally good at making stone
sculptures but not so great on wood You go to an exhibition and see some great wood
figures and happen to meet the artist The artist tells you about his techniques and the tools
he uses Assuming you want to get better on wood will you start laughing at this artist and
belittle his tools
In a similar fashion if you are a deep value investor what should be your reaction to the
success of investors who buy and hold seemingly overvalued stocks
Durable success
I know what the first objection is to this line of thinking mdash the success of these investors is
just dumb luck These guys are not really practicing value investing but a form of
momentum investing It is just that the momentum has lasted for five years in some of these
cases and sooner or later this bubble would burst
My counterpoint sure that is possible but what if this bubble has lasted for 10-15 years in
some cases Will you still just wave away these anomalies and label them as flukes
I prefer to take a different approach There is no religious debate to this in my mind mdash if
something has worked for 3+ years in the stock market then it is worthy of investigation A
lot of bubbles and temporary fads usually get washed out in 2-3 years and so 3 years is good
cut-off point
Why not 5 years Well now we are moving from the physical to the meta-physical and
debating the nature of reality
So what can one learn from this oddity where some companies manage to sell for seemingly
high valuations for a very long time
New business model or value capture
I think the first point to look for is whether there is a change occurring in the business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 313
modeldesign wherein due to changing customer needs and priorities a new type of design
is now more suited to meet them more profitably
I would recommend reading the book ndash Value Migration which goes over this concept in
quite a bit of detail The main point is that changing customer needs and priorities cause a
change in the business design best suited to meet them Companies which can identify and
develop a business model to meet this new reality are able to accrue a lot of value for their
shareholders
For example a rise in the income levels has caused the retail consumer to now value quality
brand image and convenience in addition to the price As a result companies which can
meet this new set of needs have been able to create a lot of value
It is easy to see this phenomenon around us mdash bathroom fittings automotive batteries
garments etc Some of these products were commodities in the past sold largely based on
price However increasing consumer purchasing power has meant that the priorities have
shifted beyond price Companies which have been able to adapt their business model to
deliver on these new priorities of brand quality and convenience in addition to price have
delivered exceptional returns Example Cera Sanitary Amara Raja Astral Poly etc
Opportunity size with durability
It is not sufficient to be able to meet the changing needs of the consumer better than the
competition For starters the opportunity size should be large so that the company can
grow for a long time to come
This is a major advantage of the Indian markets over almost all other foreign markets Even
niches in India have a market size running to millions of consumers and hence a company
which can build a good business model can easily grow for years to come
An additional point to keep in mind is the need for the company to develop a durable
competitive advantage Letrsquos take the case of the telecom industry in the early 2000s The
need for communication and mobile telephony was recognised by a few companies such as
Airtel in the late 90s and these companies moved in quickly to satisfy the needs
The market size was in the 100s of millions and most of the telecom companies were able to
scale rapidly However the edge or competitive advantage turned out to be transitory and as
a result after a few years of high profitability we soon had a lot of price-based competition
As a result by 2007-08 most companies were losing money and did not create (actually
destroyed) wealth
In such cases seemingly overvalued companies were truly overvalued
THE BIG STORY SPECIALS PERSPECTIVE PIXTORY ENTERPRISE STRATEGY MARKETS CEST LA VIE
EVENTS
Search Here
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 413
Kings of their domain
A productive area for finding multi-baggers is in the microcap space where the company
operates in a niche and is growing rapidly as its business model is uniquely suited for that
niche In addition the niche is large enough for the company to grow for a long time yet not
so big that it attracts large companies initially
There are a few examples which come to my mind Think of air coolers a few years back
(Symphony) CPVC pipes (Astral Poly) or various niche in pharma and information
technology
A small company develops a unique set of skills for this specific segment and is able to
dominate and grow within the segment for a long time In addition as the niche is quite
small it does not attract much competition till it reaches a certain size
However by the time the niche is big enough to catch the attention of larger companies in
the overall space it is too late as the specific company has established a dominant
competitive position and cannot be dislodged
A lot of these companies appear to be overpriced after they have started growing but this
ignores the possibility of above average growth and a dominant position for the company
Capacity to suffer
This is a term used by Thomas Russo (see the talk here) to describe companies which are
capable and willing to make investments in the business for the long term even though it
penalises the profit in the short term
In most cases due to market pressures companies are not willing to hurt short-term
profitability to build the business for the long term and hence the few companies which are
willing to do so appear to be overvalued due to depressed profits
Look at the example of Bajaj Corp (an old holding which I have since exited) The company
acquired the No-Marks brand in 2013 and started deducting the brand value on their PampL
account In reality the brand value was actually going up as the company continued to spend
heavily on advertising (17 of sales) and hence the profit was understated
The market did not like this short-term penalty and punished the stock in 2013 The stock
price has since recovered and we have a company which appeared to be overvalued due to
the high investments in the business
Platform Business
This link leads to a good note on what is a platform business
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 513
I do not have an example in the Indian market but will try to explain this using the example
of a well know US company It is 2004 and a company called Google decides to launch its
IPO at a then PE of around 65 A cursory look shows the company to be grossly overvalued
and as a result most of the value investors tend to give it a pass
The company has since then delivered a return of around 26 compounded and I am sure
this qualifies as a great return So why did a company which appeared so overvalued turn
out to be a 10-bagger
My own understanding is that this result came about from multiple factors To begin with
the company operates in a winner-take-all kind of a market where the No1 company tends
to dominate and capture almost all of its value Once Google had 60+ market share the
network effects kicked in and the company just kept getting more dominant in the search
space
Once this base was built the company extended it to other platforms such as mobile where
the next leg of growth has kicked in These types of companies also have a very low marginal
cost of production and hence any growth beyond a threshold drops straight to the bottom
line
This however does not explain fully the reason behind its success We have a management
which in the words of Prof Bakshi in this note are intelligent fanatics and also have the
capacity to suffer (as referenced by Thomas Russo) As a result they have continuously
invested in long-term ideas (called as moonshots) even if it meant losses in the near term
YouTube Android etc which are now bearing fruit were drains at one point of time
Such companies have been referred as platform companies and usually appear highly
overvalued in the early stages of growth Another similar company seems to be Facebook
A point of caution for every successful platform company there are atleast 10 pretenders
which destroy value So it is not easy to identify such companies ex-ante (atleast for me)
Rate of change matters
Let me introduce a new concept business clock speed which I read here This is the rate at
which a business is changing For example the rate of change in the social media business is
high and conversely there are businesses such as paints or undergarments where the rate of
change is low
I think it is quite obvious that businesses with low rate of change can create durable
competitive advantage for the long term and hence a seemingly high price turns out to be
cheap
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 613
Is the company overvalued simply because the management is investing in the business
for the long term which has suppressed the near term profits
Is the company developing a new business model which meets the changing
requirements of the consumer much better than competition
Does the company have a durable advantage and a large opportunity space (the case for a
lot of FMCG companies in India)
Does the company have network effects or is it a platform company run by an intelligent
fanatic
Has the company identified and developed a unique business model for a niche which it
will dominate for a long time
On the contrary very few high change businesses (Google Facebook being a few
exceptions) turn out to justify their sky high valuations It is difficult to establish a strong
competitive position in an industry where the basis of competition keeps changing every few
years Just look at IBM which has had to re-invent itself almost every decade to stay in
business and grow its value For every IBM there is DEC or Sun Microsystems which did
not make it
It is quite rare
It is important to understand at this point that it is quite rare to find overvalued companies
which in hindsight turn out to be undervalued A lot of overvalued companies actually turn
out to be just that and so it is important for a value-minded investor to be cautious about
such companies
In addition it is not easy to identify such companies upfront (there are no simple screens
for it) and one has to think deeply to develop the right insights to buy and hold such
companies
So why study
As I stated in the beginning of this note mdash if you want to be a successful investor it is
important to have as many mental models in your head Investing in cheap low valuation
companies is one such mental model However this does not mean one should just wave
away any company which is selling at a high price
The advantage of understanding the drivers of success is that the next time when you are
evaluating a company it makes sense to check if this company fits into any of these models
One can ask some of these questions
642018 The value of lsquoovervaluedrsquo stocks | Outlook Business
httpswwwoutlookbusinesscomperspectivethe-value-of-overvalued-stocks-4408 713
My post above does not cover all possible reasons why a seemingly overvalued company
will turn out to be cheap There is no standard formula or screen which will give you the
answers One has to study the company and the industry deeply to develop any useful
insights (as fuzzy as they may be)
Inspite the odds if however if you do manage to get it right it would be stupid to sell the
company based on a PE ratio which appears higher than normal
Stocks discussed in this post are for educational purpose only and not
recommendations to buy or sell Please read disclaimer towards the end of
valueinvestorindiablogspotcom The writer is a value investor and tweets
at rohitchauhan
Heres your chance to read the latest issue of Outlook Business for free Download theOutlook Magazines app now Available on Play Store and App Store
ROHIT CHAUHAN OVERVALUED STOCKS VALUE MIGRATION AIRTEL THOMAS RUSSOSANJAY BAKSHI GOOGLE YOUTUBE FACEBOOK
MORE FROM OUTLOOK BUSINESS
0 Comments Outlook Business Login1
Share⤤ Sort by Best
LOG IN WITH OR SIGN UP WITH DISQUS
Name
Start the discussionhellip
Be the first to comment
Subscribe Add Disqus to your siteAdd DisqusAdddDisqus Privacy PolicyPrivacy PolicyPrivacy
Recommend
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 15
Opinion This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdashand you probably havenrsquot heard of himBy Glen ArnoldPublished May 31 2018 1140 am ET
The Berkshire Hathaway CEO so admired Lou Simpson that he suggested the Geico CIO could step in for him if needed
Bloomberg
Lou Simpson pictured in 2011
Geico is probably the best investment Warren Buffett ever made Much is due to the terrific performance of the insurerrsquosunderwriters But what turbocharged his return is the investment record of GEICOrsquos chief investment officer
Lou Simpsonrsquos record at Geico from 1979 to 2010 rivals that of Buffett at Berkshire Hathaway BRKA +070 BRKB+037 but he remains little-known except by true Buffett fans
Despite their different investment choices Simpson now 81 years old and Buffett in many ways have similar investmentphilosophies Buffett so admired Simpson that he suggested at one time that the Geico CIO could step in shouldsomething happen to himself and Charlie Munger For his part Simpson said his smaller portfolio gave him an advantageover Buffett While they were both running concentrated portfolios of less than 15 to 20 shares (often seven companies orless) Buffett had to manage up to $40 billion whereas Simpson usually had less than $4 billion
Like Buffett Simpson developed his investment approach through trial and error evolving over decades Earlier in hiscareer long before being hired by Geico he was a ldquogrowth investorrdquo often failing to properly consider whether that growthwas being offered at a reasonable price He was aiming for spectacular returns from a few star performers hoping that hehad guessed the future correctly
But through bitter experience he learned that good long-run results come from buying companies with established highperformance (rather than mere promises of future riches) with low risk and at a low price
Today many people can crunch the companyrsquos numbers and determine whether the share price looks cheap But theyneed to be equally sharp in judging qualitative factors he told an audience at Northwestern Universityrsquos Kellogg School ofManagement in November 2017
ldquoAs Warren used to tell me ldquoYoursquore better off being approximately right than exactly wrongrdquo For example one thing youneed to determine is Are the companyrsquos leaders honest Do they have integrity Do they have huge turnover Do they
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 25
treat their people poorly Does the CEO believe in running the business for the long term or is he or she focused on thenext quarterrsquos consensus earningsrdquo
Buffett highlighted Simpsonrsquos impressive performance data from 1980 through 2004 in his 2004 letter to shareholdersMost fund managers would consider themselves well ahead of the pack if they delivered an annual averageoutperformance of a mere 1 percentage point Simpson outperformed by a stunning 68 percentage points over a 25-year span
Geicorsquos equity portfolio gained an average of 203 a year compared to the SampP 500rsquos 135 SPX +108 Put anotherway a $10000 investment compounded at a 135 annual rate becomes $237081 after 25 years at a 203 annualrate it becomes $1015408
Of course all investors have years where they underperform the market Simpson underperformed for three years in arow As a value investor Simpson was out of step with the irrational exuberance of the late 1990s dot-com boom But hestuck to his principles and delivered great results in the years following the 2000 crash
Here are five key principles that helped Simpson in his quest for outperformance
Read (all day if you can)Simpson has a voracious appetite for financial newspapers other intelligent press annual reports industry reports andgenerally reads five to eight hours a day He like Buffett is not trading-intensive but reading-intensive and thought-intensive
Think independentlyBe skeptical of conventional wisdom Obtain your own information and do your own analysis Donrsquot get caught up in wavesof irrational behavior and emotion Be willing to consider unpopular and unloved companies as they often offer the greatestopportunities
Make few investments Hold them for a long timeSimpson continues to invest through SQ Advisors where he is chairman Good investment ideas mdash companies that meethis investment criteria mdash are hard to find So when he finds one he makes a large commitment
Typically SQ Advisors adds just one or two investments a year to a portfolio of 10 to 15 stocks and drops one or two hetold that Northwestern audience And sometimes the best plan is to do nothing
SQ Advisorsrsquo holdingsCompany Ticker Industry Shares held as of
March 31(thousands)
Value as ofMarch 31
($millions)
Total return -2018 through
May 25Allison TransmissionHoldings Inc
ALSN+133
TrucksConstructionFarmMachinery
8899 $3476 0
Brookfield AssetManagement IncClass A
BAMA+043
Investment Managers 8839 $3447 -4
Charles Schwab Corp SCHW+200
InvestmentBanksBrokers
5960 $3112 12
CarMax Inc KMX+141
Specialty Stores 4948 $3065 5
Liberty Global PLCClass C
LBTYK+267
CableSatellite TV 9573 $2913 -18
Cable One Inc CABO+035
CableSatellite TV 365 $2507 -6
Apple Inc AAPL+180
TelecommunicationsEquipment
1209 $2028 12
Sensata TechnologiesHolding PLC
ST+213
ElectronicEquipmentInstruments
3880 $2010 2
Tyler Technologies Inc TYL+003
Data Processing Services 878 $1853 29
CharterCommunications Inc
CHTR+032
CableSatellite TV 625 $1944 -20
642018 This investor rivals Warren Buffett mdash and you probably havenrsquot heard of him - MarketWatch
httpswwwmarketwatchcomstorythis-investor-rivals-warren-buffett-and-you-probably-havent-heard-of-him-2018-05-30print 35
Class ABerkshire HathawayInc Class B
BRKB+037
Multi-Line Insurance 798 $1591 -2
Liberty BroadbandCorp Class C
LBRDK-025
SpecialtyTelecommunications
1596 $1368 -16
Axalta CoatingSystems Ltd
AXTA+119
Industrial Specialties 32 $0971 0
SBA CommunicationsCorp Class A
SBAC+026
Real Estate InvestmentTrusts
5 $0876 -3
Hexcel Corp HXL+089
Aerospace amp Defense 5 $0339 16
Source SEC 13-F filing for March 31 2018 FactSetSimpson admits that mastering inactivity is difficult to do because it ldquois very boringrdquo but it is often the right thing to do
ldquoWarren used to say you should think of investing as somebody giving you a fare card with 20 punches Each time youmake a change punch a hole in the card Once you have made your 20th change you have to stick with what you ownThe point is just to be very careful with each decision you make The more decisions you make the higher the chancesare that you will make a poor decisionrdquo he said at Northwestern
Buy at a reasonable priceLook at the rate of return on shareholdersrsquo money used within the business If it is high and sustainable given the strategicposition of the company and the quality of management then there is a good chance of long-run appreciation in the shareprice Cash-flow return rather than profit return can be a useful additional metric given that it is more difficult tomanipulate than profit
Once a superior business has been identified then its shares should only be bought if the price is not excessive relative toits prospects Simpson uses indicators such as earnings yield He also uses the ratio of price to free cash flow
Sell your mistakes and hold the successesInvestors have a tendency to hold on to losing shares mdash they might come back and who wants to crystallize a loss mdashwhile selling early those that are performing well
Simpson summed up his opposition to these notions this way during his talk at Northwestern ldquoOne thing a lot of investorsdo is they cut their flowers and water their weeds They sell their winners and keep their losers hoping the losers willcome back even Generally itrsquos more effective to cut your weeds and water your flowers Sell the things that didnrsquot workout and let the things that are working out runhellipIf Irsquove made one mistake in the course of managing investments it wasselling really good companies too soon Because generally if yoursquove made good investments they will last for a longtimerdquo
Glen Arnold is an investor and the author of ldquoThe Deals of Warren Buffett Vol 1 The First $100 Millionrdquo
Also from Glen Arnold 4 Warren Buffett mistakes that can make you a better investor
More from MarketWatch
Damn the torpedoes mdash what could take the SampP 500 to 3000What Americarsquos gun fanatics wonrsquot tell youSampP 500 logs longest losing streak of the year as trade-war jitters weigh
We Want to Hear from YouJoin the conversation
Comment
BACK TO TOP
MarketWatch
Site IndexTopics
MM
Global Macro Mid-Year Outlook
Cycle Maturing but Not Ending
For important disclosures refer to the Disclosure Section located at the end of this report
The global expansion should continue at above-trend speed in 2H18 and
2019 driven by the ongoing capex and productivity recovery The cycle
has more room to go as we see limited signs of overheating Speed
bumps could emerge if the lift in Fed real rates causes major stress in US
corporate credit
May 8 5 PM GMT
M
4
M
Why this cycle still has more legs
An intensifying debate about the length of the global cycle Over
the last few weeks in our conversations with investors we sensed
increased concerns about the strength and duration of the global
expansion cycle A variety of reasons have been cited as concerns
The rise of protectionism risks softening data prints in DM a seem-
ingly more intense tightening in China and most recently the adverse
impact that rising US yields and an appreciating USD would have on
EM economies have added to worries that the cycle might end soon
Rising concerns stable growth Despite the emergence of these
concerns global growth has actually held up well at 4Y in 1Q18
similar to its pace in previous quarters Sequentially DM growth has
moderated but this has been offset by stronger EM growth sup-
ported by China Moreover transitory factors have impacted DM
growth in 1Q (for more details see the box on the next page) and as
the effects of these factors fade we expect sequential growth in DM
to improve
Staying constructive on the cycle From a broader perspective our
base case remains that the global economic expansion still has room
to run However as the cycle matures we do expect a slight modera-
tion in global growth to a still above-trend pace in the coming quar-
ters On an annual average basis we expect global real GDP to grow
at 39Y in 2018 and 38Y in 2019 as compared to 37Y in 2017
and 34Y in 2012-16 We see global nominal GDP (G3 and BRIC)
growing by 65Y in 2018 and 66Y in 2019 compared to 66Y in
2017
This recovery has been different from previous cycles We often
hear the argument that this expansion has been rather long and
would enter its tenth year in 2019 However the passage of time is
not the best indicator to predict when the business cycle would end
This recovery (which had been sub-par until 2016) was preceded by
a very deep recession and has been interrupted by a number of tem-
porary crises
Cycle maturing but not ending Exhibit 3
Global growth Moderating but still above trend
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global Real GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Long-term avg = 35
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Global is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Exhibit 4
Nominal GDP growth Stable at cycle highs
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2003 2005 2007 2009 2011 2013 2015 2017 2019
Global (G3 amp BRIC) nominal GDP growth Y
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 5
Morgan Stanley real GDP growth forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 37 31 39 43 24 38 45 34
G10 23 16 22 26 04 20 27 13
US 23 20 27 31 04 22 28 12EA 25 18 21 23 05 19 31 12Japan 17 05 13 16 03 15 20 11UK 18 06 12 17 -01 10 18 14EM 48 42 50 56 37 50 58 48
China 69 62 66 68 56 64 67 56India 64 65 75 82 65 77 85 73Brazil 10 21 27 31 18 34 40 23Russia 15 -05 18 30 -10 17 31 18
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note The above aggregates are PPP-weighted
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 5
MTransitory factors affecting DM
growth in 1Q18
DM growth slowed sequentially to an estimated 16Q
SAAR from an average pace of 25 over the past four
quarters The slowdown in sequential growth was broad-
based across G4 However this moderation in growth can
be partly attributed to transitory factors In the US the
main drivers were a payback in consumption in 1Q18 after
widely publicised tax cuts and hurricane-related auto
replacement had boosted consumption in 4Q17 and
residual seasonality In the euro area issues such as tax
hikes the shifting of the timing of Easter unusually cold
weather and strikes in parts of the region partially
impacted growth In Japan consumption took a hit too in
1Q18 due to weather-related issues Moreover in some
cases the dip in high-frequency indicators appears to have
been more pronounced in the soft data (such as PMIs)
due to heady levels previously rather than in the hard
data As the impact of these transitory factors fades we
expect growth to improve from 2Q18 onwards However
the cycle is more mature in DM and there is less
economic slack than before Hence we are expecting
growth to return to a 2Q SAAR pace over the forecast
horizon as compared to 25 over the past four quarters
While growth has moved to an above-trend pace in 2017 and the
cycle is now maturing there are limited signs that the cycle will
be ending over the next 18 months Our constructive view is
informed by the following observations
1) Capex cycle not stretched productivity improvements to be sus-
tained From the perspective of a stylised business cycle we believe
that the global economy has moved from a gradual recovery phase
in 2017 to a productive growth phase (ie strong growth driven by
capex and improvements in productivity) Both capex and produc-
tivity have improved recently after a prolonged phase of post-crisis
weakness that was driven by the confluence of cyclical and structural
reasons We think that the capex cycle is not stretched as yet given
that the recovery in global investment is in its sixth quarter and
investmentGDP ratios are below previous cycle peaks We expect
global (G4 and BRIC) investment growth to improve further to 42Y
in 2018 and 43Y in 2019 from 37Y in 2017 This should sustain the
improvement in productivity growth and mitigate overheating con-
cerns Moreover there are initial signs of a structural pick-up in pro-
ductivity as digitalisation and adoption of new technology have the
potential to increase efficiency across sectors
2) No major signs of misallocation yet except in some segments of
the US private sector On aggregate in DM there has not been a sig-
nificant uptick in private sector debtGDP trends Core inflation
while rising is not yet at concerning levels However within DM
there is some concern about financial stability risks in the US given
that there has been a meaningful pick-up in leverage in parts of the
private sector particularly among corporates For EM economies
misallocation typically tends to be reflected in higher inflation and
significant widening of current account deficits However these have
remained relatively contained in EM as a whole though they are
more stretched in select EMs than others
Exhibit 6
Capex recovery supporting a revival in productivity growth
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
-4
-2
0
2
4
6
8
1995 1998 2001 2004 2007 2010 2013 2016 2019
Global Real Investment Y
Global Labor Productivity Y - RS Fcast
Source Haver Analytics Conference Board Morgan Stanley Research Note Labour productivity data and forecasts from Conference Board real investment forecasts from Morgan Stanley Research
Exhibit 7
EMs ex China to be the main driver of global growth
-25
-15
-05
05
15
25
2002 2004 2007 2009 2012 2014 2017 2019
EMXC
DM
China
Contribution to Global GDP Growth in ppt
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note that DM includes countries under Morgan Stanley coverage only EMXC is Morgan Stanley coverage excluding Argentina Venezuela Nigeria Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
M
6
MGrowth outlook by region
DM more advanced EM catching up The global cycle is undoubt-
edly maturing But this masks important regional differences The
current cycle is clearly more advanced in DM and the US is furthest
along the cycle followed by Japan and the euro area The majority of
EMs excluding China are still in the early or mid-cycle stages of the
business cycle As regards China it is difficult to classify it according
to a traditional business cycle given its countercyclical growth
model (see below for a detailed discussion) We believe that China
will implement further tightening to address its financial risks along-
side a continuation of supply-side reforms and face a moderate slow-
down in growth as a result
Exhibit 8
G3 Private sector exits deleveraging risk attitudes improving
-5
-3
-1
1
3
5
7
9
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17
Private Debt Growth YoY
Nominal GDP Growth YoY
G3
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note Private debt includes households and non-finan-cial corporate debt
DM From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
Given the maturing economic cycle in DM we expect DM growth to
moderate somewhat to 22Y in 2018 and 20Y in 2019 from 23Y
in 2017 However this growth forecast is still stronger than the
2012-16 average economic performance of 16Y Receding head-
winds from deleveraging improving inflation expectations and nor-
malising private sector risk attitudes are supporting a recovery in
aggregate demand Stronger nominal GDP growth and improved
profitability have lifted business return expectations of the corpo-
rate sector leading to a recovery in capex spending The resulting
pick-up in productivity growth should help to sustain the DM cycle
and allow for a gradual removal of monetary policy accommodation
Exhibit 9
DMs From balance sheet recession to self-sustaining recovery
2012-16 2017-Now
Private Sectors Risk Attitudes
bull In deleveraging mode
bull Risk-averse
bull Exited deleveraging
bull Risk attitudes normal-
ised
Aggregate Demand
bull Below trend bull Above trend
Prices bull Lowflation persists bull Pricing power comes
back
Capex bull Lower return expecta-
tions weak capex
bull Return expectations
improve capex picks up
Risks
bull Premature tightening
leading to double dip
recession
bull Risk of secular stagna-
tion
bull Price and financial sta-
bility risks
Source Morgan Stanley Research
EM Chinas moderate slowdown offset by stronger growth else-
where
We expect EM growth to be 50Y in 2018 and 2019 up from 48Y
in 2017 A policy-induced slowdown in China (from 69Y in 2017 to
66Y in 2018 and 64Y in 2019) will largely be offset by an acceler-
ation in emerging markets excluding China (EMXC) growth from
36Y in 2017 to 41Y in 2018 and 42Y in 2019
Exhibit 10
China Stronger net exports contribution offsetting weaker investment
-01 -07
06 05
43
29 22 20
10
12 13 14
26
32 27 27
78
66 69 66
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2013 2016 2017 2018E
Household Consumption Govt Consumption
Investment Net Exports
Real GDP Growth
Contribution to Growth (pt)
Source CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
China Countercyclical growth model in action
Policy-makers have been on a tightening path which has raised con-
cerns about its impact on the growth trajectory
However this tightening cycle is different in three aspects from
the 2013-15 cycle (when growth slowed significantly) We assess
the pace of tightening by looking at broader credit (total social
financing) growth as our preferred metric as it covers both the impact
of monetary and fiscal (via tracking issuance of government bonds)
tightening
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 7
M
EMXC Still in early to mid-cycle phase of the business cycle
EMXC in recovery phase In EMs excluding China (EMXC) it was the
adjustment in the macro policy mix during 2012-16 that brought
about a turnaround in macro stability indicators Over the last few
quarters most EMXCs have moved out of the adjustment phase to
recovery As capacity utilisation has begun to improve with the sup-
port of consumption and exports we have seen a broad-based
recovery in investment growth over the last three quarters
EM fundamentals and policy mix still favourable in aggregatehellip
We assess EM fundamentals by looking at the policy mix including
real rate buffers fiscal policy and labour market policies and the
impact of this policy mix on macro stability indicators The policy mix
is still favourable at this juncture with major EMs maintaining ade-
quate real interest rate buffers staying on a path of fiscal consolida-
tion while real wage growth trends are broadly in line with real GDP
growth Moreover the inflation and current account trends for most
EMs have remained well within the central banksrsquo comfort zone
Given the favourable policy mix and early stage of the growth cycle
there is more room for growth to be sustained at close to current
levels without creating a major deterioration in macro stability indi-
cators
1 The tightening cycle has been more gradual During the
2013-15 cycle broader credit growth slowed by 930bp in a
period of 25 months In the current cycle broader credit
growth has slowed by 400bp in the past 24 months (until
March 2018)
2 The bulk of the tightening is now behind us We expect a
further cumulative deceleration in broader credit growth of
about 100bp in the next 12 months
3 This tightening is countercyclical In 2013-15 as tightening
was under way export growth continued to decelerate In this
cycle export growth has been strong Indeed as policy-
makers continue to pare back stimulus in the infrastructure
and real estate sectors net exports private investment and
consumption are providing offsets helping to support
overall growth momentum On our estimates from 2016 to
2018 the contribution of net exports to GDP growth has
swung by 120bp (from being a drag to a boost) offsetting the
decline in the contribution from investment
Given this backdrop we expect only a moderate slowdown in Chinarsquos
growth to 66Y in 2018 and China should continue to account for
about one-third of global growth in 2018
Exhibit 11
EMs ex China Adequate real rate buffers maintained
28
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mar-04 Mar-06 Mar-08 Mar-10 Mar-12 Mar-14 Mar-16 Mar-18
EMXC Real Short Rate Differentials with US point
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Bloomberg Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note EMXC includes Brazil India Indo-nesia Korea Mexico Poland Russia South Africa and Turkey
Exhibit 12
EMs ex China Macro stability in better shape today vs 2013
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-25
-20
-15
-10
Mar-09 Mar-11 Mar-13 Mar-15 Mar-17 Mar-18
EMXC Current Account Balance as of GDP (LS)
EMXC Headline Inflation Y (RS)
2013 Taper
Tantrum
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Includes major countries which faced high inflationlarge external deficits before the taper tantrum (India Indonesia South Africa Turkey Brazil and Colombia)
hellipthough macro stability is relatively stretched in select EMs
Macro stability risks in the bulk of the EM universe are therefore pro-
jected to remain low to moderate though there are a few select EMs
like Turkey and Argentina which do have stretched macro stability
indicators and where some adjustment in the policy mix is necessary
In Colombia and South Africa macro stability indicators are also
somewhat more stretched relative to other EMs but have shown sig-
nificant improvement recently
M
8
MInflation Higher but no major overshoot
Global headline inflation is projected to rise given a backdrop of
a further reduction in output gaps rising oil prices and fading of tempo-
rary factors that have held core inflation down in 2017 ( Exhibit 14 )
DM core inflation rising Global core inflation is set to pick up grad-
ually over the forecast horizon The increase in underlying inflation
should mainly be driven by G3 core inflation which we expect to rise
from 13Y in 1Q18 to 16Y in 4Q18 and 18Y in 4Q19 ( Exhibit 13 )
No significant overshoot relative to central banksrsquo targets At the
same time our long-standing view is that a significant overshoot in
G3 inflation above central banksrsquo goals is less likely This is because
core inflation remains relatively low as wage growth remains more
moderate than during previous cycles and structural factors such as
technology diffusion and globalisation continue to keep upward
pressures in check
Why there are limited risks of a significant overshoot in US core
PCE price inflation In the case of the US there has been concern
that a confluence of factors ndash rising commodity prices the unem-
ployment rate moving below its long-run normal levels and past
dollar weakness ndash will lead to an overshoot in core inflation While
our forecasts suggest that core PCE should rise modestly above the
2Y goal over the forecast horizon we think that a significant over-
shoot seems less likely
First as our US team noted there are no indications of broad-
based inflationary pressures as almost the entire rise in core infla-
tion since last November has been driven by base effects in cellphone
services (the impact of last years price cuts dropping out) and price
increases in the hospital and financial services categories
Second wage growth is still moderate compared to previous
cycles and below levels that would provide major upside risks to
inflation (ie not exceeding the Fedrsquos 2Y inflation goal plus trend
labour productivity growth) ( Exhibit 15 )
Third structural factors such as technology diffusion and glo-
balisation are likely to check the rise in inflationary pressures
Indeed during 2005-07 despite the confluence of a persistent
depreciation in USD a rise in commodity prices an unemployment
rate lower than its long-run normal level and accelerating wage
growth and a rise in China non-commodity producer prices core PCE
did not overshoot 2Y by a significant magnitude ( Exhibit 16 )
Exhibit 13
G3 core inflation to pick up further
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
Dec-03 Dec-05 Dec-07 Dec-09 Dec-11 Dec-13 Dec-15 Dec-17 Dec-19
US Core PCE
Euro Area Core
Japan Core Core (adj for consumption tax increase)
MS fcast
Source Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 14
Morgan Stanley inflation forecasts Base bull and bear cases
2017 2018E 2019E 2020-22
Base Bear Base Bull Bear Base Bull Base
GLOBAL 25 28 29 31 24 28 32 28
G10 18 19 21 24 08 17 26 19
US 21 26 26 30 11 19 30 20
EA 15 15 17 18 04 16 21 17
Japan 05 07 11 13 03 10 17 15
UK 27 21 25 30 19 21 30 22
EM 31 35 34 35 35 35 36 34
China 16 21 24 26 19 25 28 25
India 33 50 46 44 55 44 43 40
Brazil 35 35 31 28 45 39 37 40
Russia 37 50 30 20 70 42 28 40
Source IMF Morgan Stanley Research forecasts Note Global and EM aggregates are calculated excluding Argentina and Venezuela
Exhibit 15
US Moderate wage growth limiting upside risks to core inflation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mar-86 Mar-90 Mar-94 Mar-98 Mar-02 Mar-06 Mar-10 Mar-14 Mar-18
Average Hourly Earnings Y 3MMA
Compensation Per Hour Y 4QMA
Labor Productivity Y 12QMA plus 2 Inflation
Source BLS Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Inflationary pressures from a tightening labour market are limited so far as wage growth remains moderate and below productivity growth (non-farm business sector output per hour in this graph) plus the 2Y inflation target
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 9
M
How restrictive will the Fed get As the Feds policy normalisation
process is already well under way there are concerns that further
rate hikes would lift real rates to meaningfully restrictive levels and
weigh on growth Our base case projections are that real policy rates
will reach ~02 by December 2018 and 07 by December 2019
This implies that real rates would rise above natural (r) in 1Q19 and
would be about 20bp higher than r in 4Q19 1 The key question that
arises in this context is what level of real rates would risk a major
slowdown in growth In the previous two cycles real policy rates had
risen by about 200bp above the natural rate before the expansion
ended a few quarters later In this regard considering our forecast of
actual real rates and r we project the US expansion to be sustained
through to end-2019 (we see a recession probability of 15)
1 Our estimate of the natural rate of interest (r) is 05 which is based on the
Laubach and Williams model (2003) but calculated based on our trend productivity
growth estimate of 17
EM inflation ndash rising but also not above targets on a sustained
basis Inflation in EM is set to rise too given that the ongoing eco-
nomic recovery should lead to a rise in capacity utilisation Headline
inflation will likely also rise in the near term due to higher energy
prices However for most economies we are expecting inflation to
remain within the central banksrsquo targets (or comfort zones) as the
overall policy mix remains favourable Productivity growth is recov-
ering an adequate level of real rates is being maintained fiscal policy
is still on a path of consolidation and there is no major distortion of
labour markets
Central banks on a path of policy
normalisation
DM central banks to reduce monetary accommodation As DM
growth remains relatively strong we should see a further tightening
of labour markets and rise in capacity utilisation driving core inflation
higher which should continue to encourage central banks to lean
against still easy financial conditions G4 central banks should either
continue (in the case of the Fed) or embark on a path of policy normal-
isation While we expect the ECB to end asset purchases in December
2018 and hike deposit rates in June 2019 and the BoJ to adjust the
10-year JGB yield to around 015 in 1Q19 monetary policy will still
be expansionary (see Exhibit 17 for detailed forecasts on central
bank policy actions)
Exhibit 17
Key central banks Next moves
Central Bank
Policy Action
Fed 2 more hikes in 2018 3 hikes in 2019
ECB Begin tapering asset purchases in Oct-18 ending purchases
in Dec-18 One 15bp deposit rate hike in Jun-19
BOJ Adjust 10Y JGB yield target to around 015 (0-03) in
1Q19
BOE 1 hike in 3Q18 2 hikes in 2019
PBOC Increase in bank deposit rates via liberalisation of deposit
rate caps
RBI 1 hike in 4Q18 2 hikes in 2019
BCB 25bp cut in 2Q18 125bp hike in 2019
CBR 2 more cuts in 2018 on hold in 2019
Source Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
Exhibit 16
US Core PCE did not overshoot by significant magnitude above 2Y in
2005-07
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-6
-4
-2
1
3
5
7
9
Jun-03 Jun-04 Jun-05 Jun-06 Jun-07
USD TWI Y - LS leading by 18M above zero indicates USD deprecation
Average Hourly Earnings Y - RS
US Core PCE Y - RS
China Non-Commodity PPI Y (RMB) - LS leading by 14M
Unemployment Gap (RS)
Dec-07
Source CEIC Haver Analytics Morgan Stanley Research Note TWI stands for trade-weighted index Unemployment gap = actual unemployment rate minus long-run normal level
Assessing the sensitivity of higher oil prices
Given the recent rise in oil prices there has been an
increased attention on the impact higher oil prices could
have on headline inflation In this regard for the G4 +
BRIC economies we have analysed the impact of a
sustained average US$10bbl increase in Brent crude
prices relative to what futures are pricing Our analysis
suggests that headline inflation (G4 + BRIC) would be
above our baseline forecast by 20bp in 2018 and 10bp
in 2019 Importantly the pass-through to G3 core
inflation would be more moderate and occur with
somewhat of a lag raising our 2018 forecast by 5bp and
our 2019 forecast by 10bp above the baseline forecast of
an average 14Y in 2018 and 17Y in 2019
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 17
M
Bear Base Bull
US Ellen Zentner amp US Economics Team
Trade fears lead to a decline in investment
while volatile markets negate the benefit from
tax stimulus Additionally global growth flags
The Fed forgoes hiking in September as the bal-
ance sheet tightening triggers adverse finan-
cial market developments With incoming data
pointing to negative GDP growth in 4Q18 the
Fed begins to cut rates back towards zero as the
US enters recession and halts balance sheet
drawdown simultaneously
The expansion continues with tailwinds from
fiscal stimulus countering the effects of trade
tensions and heightened market volatility
Household consumption holds up well and
capex continues to be a source of strength
supporting productivity growth Growth accel-
erates to an average 27Y in 2018 with a
rebound in 2Q following a slow start to the
year caused by transitory factors before
slowing to 22Y in 2019
The theory of low multipliers in a late-cycle envi-
ronment does not hold Fiscal multipliers turn out
to be larger than expected and propel GDP
growth to above 3Y A non-linear Phillips curve
comes through with a vengeance and monetary
policy responds more aggressively The economy
goes through a boombust cycle that ends in US
recession by end-2019
Euro area Daniele Antonucci amp EA Economics Team
Trade policy uncertainty escalates thus
implying weaker output growth and lowering
business sentiment more generally Financial
conditions tighten which the ECB fails to offset
with a more expansionary policy ndash given a more
limited toolkit
The euro area is becoming more mid-cycle
with growth slowing from 25Y in 2017 to
~20Y on average in 2018 and 2019 With
less slack in the economy inflation continues
to rise and the ECB keep normalising policy
but more gradually than previously envisaged
Wage growth rises faster as we move into a
steeper part of the Philips curve Productivity
accelerates in a reaction to a stronger recovery in
capex Fiscal policy becomes more supportive
and boosts GDP by a more meaningful extent
Japan Takeshi Yamaguchi amp Hiromu Uezato
Weaker external demand including a US reces-
sion hurts Japanrsquos exports and capex If PM Abe
steps down due to declining Cabinet support
rates some of the policies in Abenomics could
be reversed Other downside risks include
higher oil prices andpremature policy normali-
sation by the BoJ
We retain our view that the mild economic
expansion will continue as a trend until the
next consumption tax hike in October 2019
That said we think the economy has entered
the late-cycle phase of its expansion Japan is
making a gradual exit from deflation
Japanrsquos exports and capex gain from a stronger
than-expected global recovery We see a risk of
more expansionary fiscal policy towards 2019
ahead of important national elections and the
c-tax hike PM Abe announcing a postponement of
the next c-tax is still a possibility An early snap
election could reduce political uncertainty
UK Jacob Nell
Trade talks break down (no deal) The UK
moves into a WTO relationship with the EU in
March 2019 pushing the economy into a reces-
sion and keeping the MPC on hold through the
forecast horizon
We see heightened uncertainty before a last-
minute deal for a soft Brexit Growth stalls in
the Brexit endgame in 4Q181Q19 before a
modest 2019 recovery The MPC hikes once
this year pauses until the UK has navigated
Brexit and then hikes twice in 2019
Early agreement on a soft Brexit outcome drives
a rebound in growth which holds at nearly 2Y
through 201819In this scenario we would expect
more aggressive tightening from the MPC with
the policy rate reaching 175 by end-2019
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash DM
M
18
M
Bear Base Bull
China Robin Xing Jenny Zheng amp Zhipeng Cai
A rise in US-China trade frictionweaker-than-
expected growth in the US could drag down
Chinarsquos exports growth and a more aggressive
domestic tightening could weigh on both public
and private capex As a result GDP growth
could decelerate rapidly to 62Y in 2018 and
56Y in 2019 and CPI could be subdued at
21Y in 2018 and 19Y in 2019 amid weaker
wage growth
We expect Chinarsquos real GDP growth to moderate
from 69Y in 2017 to 66Y in 2018 and
64Y in 2019 led by weaker public and prop-
erty investment growth amid calibrated policy
tightening Meanwhile we expect a mild CPI
reflation from 16Y in 2017 to 24Y in 2018
and 25Y in 2019 led by higher core CPI and
food price normalisation
A stronger-than-expected global recovery and
milder-than-expected pace of domestic delev-
eraging could lift Chinarsquos exports and capex As
a result real GDP growth can remain resilient at
68Y in 2018 and 67Y in 2019 supporting
headline CPI at 26Y in 2018 and 28Y in
2019 close to the upper bound of the PBOCrsquos
comfort zone
India Derrick Kam Avni Jain
The financial system remains impaired and is
unable to fully support a recovery in growth
Policy uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and
post the election which coupled with weaker
trade and tighter financial conditions globally
results in businesses holding back on spending
posing a drag on growth
A synchronous recovery in consumption and
exports lifts capacity utilisation which incentiv-
ises the corporate sector to invest Moreover a
repair of corporate balance sheets and recapi-
talisation of state-owned banks leads to an
improvement in sentiment Both these factors
should pave the way for a private capex recovery
in 2018 which sets the stage for a sustained
growth cycle
The capex recovery happens at a quicker and
stronger pace due to a combination of a
stronger pick-up in demand and easing lending
conditions strengthening the growth
momentum Stronger fiscal spending ahead of
the elections would boost consumption expend-
iture particularly in rural areas
Russia Alina Slyusarchuk
External demand weakens New geopolitical
tensions result in the US adding systemic Rus-
sian SOEs to the OFAC SDN list The state
increases control over the economy and fails to
deliver micro reforms to boost growth which
translates into lower investment This keeps
uncertainty high and investment depressed Oil
price and RUB volatility translate into higher
inflation
An orthodox policy-makersrsquo response to the
new external shocks helps to stabilise the
economy Inflation averages 30Y in 2018 sup-
porting household real incomes The CBR moves
to neutral monetary policy cutting rates to
675 in 2018 The fiscal rule preserves budget
discipline and results in a federal budget surplus
at 15 of GDP
The Comprehensive Government Action Plan
with the pro-reform agenda including measures
such as infrastructure investment redistribution
of spending towards education and healthcare
as well as public service reform boosts senti-
ment supports investment and increases
potential growth Geopolitical tensions ease
Western sanctions are lifted gradually sup-
porting business confidence and growth further
Brazil Arthur Carvalho amp Thiago Machado
A non-reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections does not push forward the pension
reform and puts in place unorthodox meas-
ures This brings into question debt sustaina-
bility and puts pressure on the currency creating
strong inflationary pressures and triggering the
central bank to start hiking rates earlier than
expected impacting growth negatively
The consumer should continue to benefit from
the materially lower interest rate with some
releveraging likely in 2H18 On investment
growth although we see capex growth
remaining in positive territory we believe that
political uncertainty will have some adverse
impact Benign inflation should lead to one last
cut in May taking rates to 625 Inflation
should normalise and trigger the central bank
to hike rates again in 2019
A reformist candidate wins the presidential
elections and puts the pension reform back on
track which should lead to a pick-up in confi-
dence This would impact growth positively cre-
ating slight inflation pressures which would be
partly offset by a stronger currency The central
bank would then engage in a hiking cycle but
bring rates to a lower level as compared to our
bear case
Bull-base-bear scenarios ndash EM
M
MORGAN STANLEY RESEARCH 25
M
A shallow rate hike cycle from 4Q18 We expect the RBI to com-
mence its rate hike cycle from 4Q18 as we think that the MPC does
have time to pause and assess more incoming data before acting in
4Q This is predicated on our view that we donrsquot expect a significant
overshoot of inflation relative to the RBIrsquos target (hence reducing the
urgencyimpetus to hike rates) and that the economic recovery will
be on a surer footing by then (as we expect private capex to show
signs of recovery) Against this backdrop of greater certainty and a
more sustained recovery in growth the central bank can then move
to commence a shallow rate hike cycle Over 2018-19 we pencil in a
total of only three rate hikes taking the terminal policy rate to 675
Risks skewed to the downside In addition to the swings in trade
and financial conditions at a global level the domestic factors of pri-
vate capex momentum and the election outcome in May 2019 would
be the key swing factors In the bull case the capex recovery happens
at a quicker and stronger pace due to a combination of a stronger
pick-up in demand and easing lending conditions strengthening the
growth momentum In the bear case the financial system remains
impaired and is unable to fully support a recovery in growth Policy
uncertainty prevails in the run-up to and post the election which cou-
pled with weaker trade and tighter financial conditions globally
should result in businesses holding back on spending posing a drag
on growth
India Towards a full-fledged recovery Derrick Kam
(852) 2239 7826
Avni Jain
(91) 6118 1850
With end demand holding up well private capex appears poised
for a recovery later this year As the economy enters into a full-
fledged recovery we expect the central bank to embark on a
shallow rate hike cycle beginning from 4Q18
We maintain our expectation for a recovery in real GDP growth to
75Y in 2018 and further to 77Y in 2019 from 64Y in 2017 More
importantly we believe that the economy is on track towards a full-
fledged recovery as we expect a recovery in private capex later this
year
Full-fledged recovery to take hold Since September 2017 eco-
nomic growth has been recovering as the economy is leaving behind
the headwinds caused by the currency replacement programme and
GST implementation Private consumption expenditure has
remained robust while exports growth despite the volatile monthly
movements has also been on a recovery path More recently we
have begun to see incipient signs of a revival in investment activity
with capital goods imports and order books of engineering and con-
struction firms posting strong growth in recent months
Looking ahead as end demand holds up well we are confident that
a recovery in private capex will be under way later this year Indeed
with the current recovery in consumption and exports capacity utili-
sation ratios have already begun to pick up rising to 741 in 4Q17
from 718 previously Corporate balance sheet fundamentals are
improving with interest rates dipping below corporate revenue
growth and also reflected in favourable trends in credit ratios (rat-
ings upgrade to downgrade ratio) Together these factors should
lead to a recovery in private capex in 2018
Temporary spike in CPI inflation Softer sequential trends in food
prices have led to weaker headline CPI inflation while core measures
of inflation have been edging up Incorporating higher oil prices and
taking on board the incoming food price trends we have revised our
forecast upwards marginally to 46Y for 2018 In the June 2018
quarter favourable base effects should kick in and lead to a tempo-
rary spike in headline inflation However these effects will likely fade
by July and we expect headline inflation to average 40Y in the
December 2018 quarter
India Forecast summary
2016 2017 2018E 2019E
Real GDP (Y) 79 64 75 77
Private consumption 83 57 74 73
Government consumption 90 111 76 76
Gross fixed investment 105 66 79 86
Contribution to GDP (pp)
Final domestic demand 88 64 74 76
Net exports 02 -08 00 01
Inventories -10 -03 00 00
Unemp rate ( labour force) NA NA NA NA
CPI (Y) 50 33 46 44
Core CPI (Y) 48 46 52 46
Policy rate (eop ) 625 600 625 675
General govt balance ( GDP) -70 -67 -65 -63
Gross govt debt ( GDP) 678 667 680 680
Current account balance ( GDP) -06 -15 -16 -22
Source CSO RBI CEIC Morgan Stanley Research forecasts
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 117
L
(PDF version here)
et me tell you the story of two investors neither of whom knew
each other but whose paths crossed in an interesting way
Grace Groner was orphaned at age 12 She never married She
never had kids She never drove a car She lived most of her life alone in a
one-bedroom house and worked her whole career as a secretary She was by
all accounts a lovely lady But she lived a humble and quiet life That made
the $7 million she left to charity after her death in 2010 at age 100 all the
more confusing People who knew her asked Where did Grace get all that
money
But there was no secret There was no inheritance Grace took humble
savings from a meager salary and enjoyed eighty years of hands-off
compounding in the stock market That was it
Weeks after Grace died an unrelated investing story hit the news
Richard Fuscone former vice chairman of Merrill Lynchrsquos Latin America
division declared personal bankruptcy fighting off foreclosure on two
homes one of which was nearly 20000 square feet and had a $66000 a
month mortgage Fuscone was the opposite of Grace Groner educated at
Harvard and University of Chicago he became so successful in the
investment industry that he retired in his 40s to ldquopursue personal and
charitable interestsrdquo But heavy borrowing and illiquid investments did him
in The same year Grace Goner left a veritable fortune to charity Richard
stood before a bankruptcy judge and declared ldquoI have been devastated by
the financial crisis hellip The only source of liquidity is whatever my wife is able
to sell in terms of personal furnishingsrdquo
The purpose of these stories is not to say you should be like Grace and avoid
being like Richard Itrsquos to point out that there is no other field where
these stories are even possible
In what other field does someone with no education no relevant experience
no resources and no connections vastly outperform someone with the best
education the most relevant experiences the best resources and the best
connections There will never be a story of a Grace Groner performing heart
surgery better than a Harvard-trained cardiologist Or building a faster chip
than Applersquos engineers Unthinkable
But these stories happen in investing
Thatrsquos because investing is not the study of finance Itrsquos the study of how
people behave with money And behavior is hard to teach even to really
About Investments People Blog Projects
The Psychology of Money
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 217
smart people You canrsquot sum up behavior with formulas to memorize or
spreadsheet models to follow Behavior is inborn varies by person is hard to
measure changes over time and people are prone to deny its existence
especially when describing themselves
Grace and Richard show that managing money isnrsquot necessarily about what
you know itrsquos how you behave But thatrsquos not how finance is typically taught
or discussed The finance industry talks too much about what to do
and not enough about what happens in your head when you try to
do it
This report describes 20 flaws biases and causes of bad behavior Irsquove seen
pop up often when people deal with money
1 Earned success and deserved failure fallacy A tendency to
underestimate the role of luck and risk and a failure to recognize
that luck and risk are different sides of the same coin
I like to ask people ldquoWhat do you want to know about investing that we canrsquot
knowrdquo
Itrsquos not a practical question So few people ask it But it forces anyone you ask
to think about what they intuitively think is true but donrsquot spend much time
trying to answer because itrsquos futile
Years ago I asked economist Robert Shiller the question He answered ldquoThe
exact role of luck in successful outcomesrdquo
I love that because no one thinks luck doesnrsquot play a role in financial
success But since itrsquos hard to quantify luck and rude to suggest peoplersquos
success is owed to luck the default stance is often to implicitly ignore luck as
a factor If I say ldquoThere are a billion investors in the world By sheer chance
would you expect 100 of them to become billionaires predominately off
luckrdquo You would reply ldquoOf courserdquo But then if I ask you to name those
investors ndash to their face ndash you will back down Thatrsquos the problem
The same goes for failure Did failed businesses not try hard enough Were
bad investments not thought through well enough Are wayward careers the
product of laziness
In some parts yes Of course But how much Itrsquos so hard to know And when
itrsquos hard to know we default to the extremes of assuming failures are
predominantly caused by mistakes Which itself is a mistake
Peoplersquos lives are a reflection of the experiences theyrsquove had and the people
theyrsquove met a lot of which are driven by luck accident and chance The line
between bold and reckless is thinner than people think and you cannot
believe in risk without believing in luck because they are two sides of the
same coin They are both the simple idea that sometimes things happen that
influence outcomes more than effort alone can achieve
After my son was born I wrote him a letter
Some people are born into families that encourage education others
are against it Some are born into flourishing economies encouraging
of entrepreneurship others are born into war and destitution I want
you to be successful and I want you to earn it But realize that not all
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 317
success is due to hard work and not all poverty is due to laziness
Keep this in mind when judging people including yourself
2 Cost avoidance syndrome A failure to identify the true costs of
a situation with too much emphasis on financial costs while
ignoring the emotional price that must be paid to win a reward
Say you want a new car It costs $30000 You have a few options 1) Pay
$30000 for it 2) Buy a used one for less than $30000 3) Or steal it
In this case 99 of people avoid the third option because the consequences
of stealing a car outweigh the upside This is obvious
But say you want to earn a 10 annual return over the next 50 years Does
this reward come free Of course not Why would the world give you
something amazing for free Like the car therersquos a price that has to be paid
The price in this case is volatility and uncertainty And like the car you
have a few options You can pay it accepting volatility and uncertainty You
can find an asset with less uncertainty and a lower payoff the equivalent of a
used car Or you can attempt the equivalent of grand theft auto Take the
return while trying to avoid the volatility that comes along with it
Many people in this case choose the third option Like a car thief ndash though
well-meaning and law-abiding ndash they form tricks and strategies to get the
return without paying the price Trades Rotations Hedges Arbitrages
Leverage
But the Money Gods do not look highly upon those who seek a reward
without paying the price Some car thieves will get away with it Many more
will be caught with their pants down Same thing with money
This is obvious with the car and less obvious with investing because the true
cost of investing ndash or anything with money ndash is rarely the financial fee that is
easy to see and measure Itrsquos the emotional and physical price demanded by
markets that are pretty efficient Monster Beverage stock rose 211000
from 1995 to 2016 But it lost more than half its value on five separate
occasions during that time That is an enormous psychological price to pay
Buffett made $90 billion But he did it by reading SEC filings 12 hours a day
for 70 years often at the expense of paying attention to his family Here too
a hidden cost
Every money reward has a price beyond the financial fee you can see and
count Accepting that is critical Scott Adams once wrote ldquoOne of the best
pieces of advice Irsquove ever heard goes something like this If you want success
figure out the price then pay it It sounds trivial and obvious but if you
unpack the idea it has extraordinary powerrdquo Wonderful money advice
3 Rich man in the car paradox
When you see someone driving a nice car you rarely think ldquoWow the guy
driving that car is coolrdquo Instead you think ldquoWow if I had that car people
would think Irsquom coolrdquo Subconscious or not this is how people think
The paradox of wealth is that people tend to want it to signal to others that
they should be liked and admired But in reality those other people bypass
admiring you not because they donrsquot think wealth is admirable but because
they use your wealth solely as a benchmark for their own desire to be liked
and admired
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 417
This stuff isnrsquot subtle It is prevalent at every income and wealth level There
is a growing business of people renting private jets on the tarmac for 10
minutes to take a selfie inside the jet for Instagram The people taking these
selfies think theyrsquore going to be loved without realizing that they probably
donrsquot care about the person who actually owns the jet beyond the fact that
they provided a jet to be photographed in
The point isnrsquot to abandon the pursuit of wealth of course Or even fancy
cars ndash I like both Itrsquos recognizing that people generally aspire to be respected
by others and humility graciousness intelligence and empathy tend to
generate more respect than fast cars
4 A tendency to adjust to current circumstances in a way that
makes forecasting your future desires and actions difficult
resulting in the inability to capture long-term compounding
rewards that come from current decisions
Every five-year-old boy wants to drive a tractor when they grow up Then you
grow up and realize that driving a tractor maybe isnrsquot the best career So as a
teenager you dream of being a lawyer Then you realize that lawyers work so
hard they rarely see their families So then you become a stay-at-home
parent Then at age 70 you realize you should have saved more money for
retirement
Things change And itrsquos hard to make long-term decisions when your view of
what yoursquoll want in the future is so liable to shift
This gets back to the first rule of compounding Never interrupt it
unnecessarily But how do you not interrupt a money plan ndash careers
investments spending budgeting whatever ndash when your life plans change
Itrsquos hard Part of the reason people like Grace Groner and Warren Buffett
become so successful is because they kept doing the same thing for decades
on end letting compounding run wild But many of us evolve so much over a
lifetime that we donrsquot want to keep doing the same thing for decades on end
Or anything close to it So rather than one 80-something-year lifespan our
money has perhaps four distinct 20-year blocks Compounding doesnrsquot work
as well in that situation
There is no solution to this But one thing Irsquove learned that may help is
coming back to balance and room for error Too much devotion to one goal
one path one outcome is asking for regret when yoursquore so susceptible to
change
5 Anchored-to-your-own-history bias Your personal experiences
make up maybe 000000001 of whatrsquos happened in the world
but maybe 80 of how you think the world works
If you were born in 1970 the stock market went up 10-fold adjusted for
inflation in your teens and 20s ndash your young impressionable years when you
were learning baseline knowledge about how investing and the economy
work If you were born in 1950 the same market went exactly nowhere in
your teens and 20s
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 517
There are so many ways to cut this idea Someone who grew up in Flint
Michigan got a very different view of the importance of manufacturing jobs
than someone who grew up in Washington DC Coming of age during the
Great Depression or in war-ravaged 1940s Europe set you on a path of
beliefs goals and priorities that most people reading this including myself
canrsquot fathom
The Great Depression scared a generation for the rest of their lives Most of
them at least In 1959 John F Kennedy was asked by a reporter what he
remembered from the depression and answered
I have no first-hand knowledge of the depression My family had one
of the great fortunes of the world and it was worth more than ever
then We had bigger houses more servants we traveled more About
the only thing that I saw directly was when my father hired some
extra gardeners just to give them a job so they could eat I really did
not learn about the depression until I read about it at Harvard
Since no amount of studying or open-mindedness can genuinely recreate the
power of fear and uncertainty people go through life with totally different
views on how the economy works what itrsquos capable of doing how much we
should protect other people and what should and shouldnrsquot be valued
The problem is that everyone needs a clear explanation of how the world
works to keep their sanity Itrsquos hard to be optimistic if you wake up in the
morning and say ldquoI donrsquot know why most people think the way they dordquo
because people like the feeling of predictability and clean narratives So they
use the lessons of their own life experiences to create models of how they
think the world should work ndash particularly for things like luck risk effort
and values
And thatrsquos a problem When everyone has experienced a fraction of whatrsquos
out there but uses those experiences to explain everything they expect to
happen a lot of people eventually become disappointed confused or
dumbfounded at othersrsquo decisions
A team of economists once crunched the data on a centuryrsquos worth of
peoplersquos investing habits and concluded ldquoCurrent [investment] beliefs
depend on the realizations experienced in the pastrdquo
Keep that quote in mind when debating peoplersquos investing views Or when
yoursquore confused about their desire to hoard or blow money their fear or
greed in certain situations or whenever else you canrsquot understand why
people do what they do with money Things will make more sense
6 Historians are Prophets fallacy Not seeing the irony that
history is the study of surprises and changes while using it as a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 617
guide to the future An overreliance on past data as a signal to
future conditions in a field where innovation and change is the
lifeblood of progress
Geologists can look at a billion years of historical data and form models of
how the earth behaves So can meteorologists And doctors ndash kidneys
operate the same way in 2018 as they did in 1018
The idea that the past offers concrete directions about the future is
tantalizing It promotes the idea that the path of the future is buried within
the data Historians ndash or anyone analyzing the past as a way to indicate the
future ndash are some of the most important members of many fields
I donrsquot think finance is one of them At least not as much as wersquod like to
think
The cornerstone of economics is that things change over time because the
invisible hand hates anything staying too good or too bad indefinitely Bill
Bonner once described how Mr Market works ldquoHersquos got a lsquoCapitalism at
Workrsquo T-shirt on and a sledgehammer in his handrdquo Few things stay the same
for very long which makes historians something far less useful than
prophets
Consider a few big ones
The 401(K) is 39 years old ndash barely old enough to run for president The
Roth IRA isnrsquot old enough to drink So personal financial advice and analysis
about how Americans save for retirement today is not directly comparable to
what made sense just a generation ago Things changed
The venture capital industry barely existed 25 years ago There are single
funds today that are larger than the entire industry was a generation ago
Phil Knight wrote about his early days after starting Nike ldquoThere was no
such thing as venture capital An aspiring young entrepreneur had very few
places to turn and those places were all guarded by risk-averse gatekeepers
with zero imagination In other words bankersrdquo So our knowledge of
backing entrepreneurs investment cycles and failure rates is not something
we have a deep base of history to learn from Things changed
Or take public markets The SampP 500 did not include financial stocks until
1976 today financials make up 16 of the index Technology stocks were
virtually nonexistent 50 years ago Today theyrsquore more than a fifth of the
index Accounting rules have changed over time So have disclosures
auditing and market liquidity Things changed
The most important driver of anything tied to money is the stories people tell
themselves and the preferences they have for goods and services Those
things donrsquot tend to sit still They change with culture and generation And
theyrsquoll keep changing
The mental trick we play on ourselves here is an over-admiration of people
who have been there done that when it comes to money Experiencing
specific events does not necessarily qualify you to know what will happen
next In fact it rarely does because experience leads to more overconfidence
than prophetic ability
That doesnrsquot mean we should ignore history when thinking about money But
therersquos an important nuance The further back in history you look the more
general your takeaways should be General things like peoplersquos relationship
to greed and fear how they behave under stress and how they respond to
incentives tends to be stable in time The history of money is useful for that
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 717
kind of stuff But specific trends specific trades specific sectors and specific
causal relationships are always a showcase of evolution in progress
7 The seduction of pessimism in a world where optimism is the
most reasonable stance
Historian Deirdre McCloskey says ldquoFor reasons I have never understood
people like to hear that the world is going to hellrdquo
This isnrsquot new John Stuart Mill wrote in the 1840s ldquoI have observed that not
the man who hopes when others despair but the man who despairs when
others hope is admired by a large class of persons as a sagerdquo
Part of this is natural Wersquove evolved to treat threats as more urgent than
opportunities Buffett says ldquoIn order to succeed you must first surviverdquo
But pessimism about money takes a different level of allure Say therersquos going
to be a recession and you will get retweeted Say wersquoll have a big recession
and newspapers will call you Say wersquore nearing the next Great Depression
and yoursquoll get on TV But mention that good times are ahead or markets
have room to run or that a company has huge potential and a common
reaction from commentators and spectators alike is that you are either a
salesman or comically aloof of risks
A few things are going on here
One is that money is ubiquitous so something bad happening tends to affect
everyone albeit in different ways That isnrsquot true of say weather A
hurricane barreling down on Florida poses no direct risk to 92 of
Americans But a recession barreling down on the economy could impact
every single person ndash including you so pay attention This goes for
something as specific as the stock market More than half of all households
directly own stocks
Another is that pessimism requires action ndash Move Get out Run Sell Hide
Optimism is mostly a call to stay the course and enjoy the ride So itrsquos not
nearly as urgent
A third is that there is a lot of money to be made in the finance industry
which ndash despite regulations ndash has attracted armies of scammers hucksters
and truth-benders promising the moon A big enough bonus can convince
even honest law-abiding finance workers selling garbage products that
theyrsquore doing good for their customers Enough people have been
bamboozled by the finance industry that a sense of ldquoIf it sounds too good to
be true it probably isrdquo has enveloped even rational promotions of optimism
Most promotions of optimism by the way are rational Not all of course
But we need to understand what optimism is Real optimists donrsquot believe
that everything will be great Thatrsquos complacency Optimism is a belief that
the odds of a good outcome are in your favor over time even when there will
be setbacks along the way The simple idea that most people wake up in the
morning trying to make things a little better and more productive than wake
up looking to cause trouble is the foundation of optimism Itrsquos not
complicated Itrsquos not guaranteed either Itrsquos just the most reasonable bet for
most people The late statistician Hans Rosling put it differently ldquoI am not
an optimist I am a very serious possibilistrdquo
8 Underappreciating the power of compounding driven by the
tendency to intuitively think about exponential growth in linear
terms
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 817
IBM made a 35 megabyte hard drive in the 1950s By the 1960s things were
moving into a few dozen megabytes By the 1970s IBMrsquos Winchester drive
held 70 megabytes Then drives got exponentially smaller in size with more
storage A typical PC in the early 1990s held 200-500 megabytes
And then hellip wham Things exploded
1999 ndash Applersquos iMac comes with a 6 gigabyte hard drive
2003 ndash 120 gigs on the Power Mac
2006 ndash 250 gigs on the new iMac
2011 ndash first 4 terabyte hard drive
2017 ndash 60 terabyte hard drives
Now put it together From 1950 to 1990 we gained 296 megabytes From
1990 through today we gained 60 million megabytes
The punchline of compounding is never that itrsquos just big Itrsquos always ndash no
matter how many times you study it ndash so big that you can barely wrap your
head around it In 2004 Bill Gates criticized the new Gmail wondering why
anyone would need a gig of storage Author Steven Levy wrote ldquoDespite his
currency with cutting-edge technologies his mentality was anchored in the
old paradigm of storage being a commodity that must be conservedrdquo You
never get accustomed to how quickly things can grow
I have heard many people say the first time they saw a compound interest
table ndash or one of those stories about how much more yoursquod have for
retirement if you began saving in your 20s vs your 30s ndash changed their life
But it probably didnrsquot What it likely did was surprise them because the
results intuitively didnrsquot seem right Linear thinking is so much more
intuitive than exponential thinking Michael Batnick once explained it If I
ask you to calculate 8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8+8 in your head you can do it in a
few seconds (itrsquos 72) If I ask you to calculate 8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8x8 your
head will explode (itrsquos 134217728)
The danger here is that when compounding isnrsquot intuitive we often ignore its
potential and focus on solving problems through other means Not because
wersquore overthinking but because we rarely stop to consider compounding
potential
There are over 2000 books picking apart how Warren Buffett built his
fortune But none are called ldquoThis Guy Has Been Investing Consistently for
Three-Quarters of a Centuryrdquo But we know thatrsquos the key to the majority of
his success itrsquos just hard to wrap your head around that math because itrsquos
not intuitive There are books on economic cycles trading strategies and
sector bets But the most powerful and important book should be called
ldquoShut Up And Waitrdquo Itrsquos just one page with a long-term chart of economic
growth Physicist Albert Bartlett put it ldquoThe greatest shortcoming of the
human race is our inability to understand the exponential functionrdquo
The counterintuitiveness of compounding is responsible for the majority of
disappointing trades bad strategies and successful investing attempts Good
investing isnrsquot necessarily about earning the highest returns because the
highest returns tend to be one-off hits that kill your confidence when they
end Itrsquos about earning pretty good returns that you can stick with for a long
period of time Thatrsquos when compounding runs wild
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 917
9 Attachment to social proof in a field that demands contrarian
thinking to achieve above-average results
The Berkshire Hathaway annual meeting in Omaha attracts 40000 people
all of whom consider themselves contrarians People show up at 4 am to wait
in line with thousands of other people to tell each other about their lifelong
commitment to not following the crowd Few see the irony
Anything worthwhile with money has high stakes High stakes entail risks of
being wrong and losing money Losing money is emotional And the desire to
avoid being wrong is best countered by surrounding yourself with people
who agree with you Social proof is powerful Someone else agreeing with
you is like evidence of being right that doesnrsquot have to prove itself with facts
Most peoplersquos views have holes and gaps in them if only subconsciously
Crowds and social proof help fill those gaps reducing doubt that you could
be wrong
The problem with viewing crowds as evidence of accuracy when dealing with
money is that opportunity is almost always inversely correlated with
popularity What really drives outsized returns over time is an increase in
valuation multiples and increasing valuation multiples relies on an
investment getting more popular in the future ndash something that is always
anchored by current popularity
Herersquos the thing Most attempts at contrarianism is just irrational cynicism
in disguise ndash and cynicism can be popular and draw crowds Real
contrarianism is when your views are so uncomfortable and belittled that
they cause you to second guess whether theyrsquore right Very few people can do
that But of course thatrsquos the case Most people canrsquot be contrarian by
definition Embrace with both hands that statistically you are one of those
people
10 An appeal to academia in a field that is governed not by clean
rules but loose and unpredictable trends
Harry Markowitz won the Nobel Prize in economics for creating formulas
that tell you exactly how much of your portfolio should be in stocks vs bonds
depending on your ideal level of risk A few years ago the Wall Street Journal
asked him how given his work he invests his own money He replied
I visualized my grief if the stock market went way up and I wasnrsquot in it
ndash or if it went way down and I was completely in it My intention was
to minimize my future regret So I split my contributions 5050
between bonds and equities
There are many things in academic finance that are technically right but fail
to describe how people actually act in the real world Plenty of academic
finance work is useful and has pushed the industry in the right direction But
its main purpose is often intellectual stimulation and to impress other
academics I donrsquot blame them for this or look down upon them for it We
should just recognize it for what it is
One study I remember showed that young investors should use 2x leverage
in the stock market because ndash statistically ndash even if you get wiped out yoursquore
still likely to earn superior returns over time as long as you dust yourself off
and keep investing after a wipeout Which in the real world no one would
actually do Theyrsquod swear off investing for life What works on a spreadsheet
and what works at the kitchen table are ten miles apart
The disconnect here is that academics typically desire very precise rules and
formulas But real-world people use it as a crutch to try to make sense of a
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1017
messy and confusing world that by its nature eschews precision Those are
opposite things You cannot explain randomness and emotion with precision
and reason
People are also attracted to the titles and degrees of academics because
finance is not a credential-sanctioned field like say medicine is So the
appearance of a PhD stands out And that creates an intense appeal to
academia when making arguments and justifying beliefs ndash ldquoAccording to this
Harvard study helliprdquo or ldquoAs Nobel Prize winner so and so showed helliprdquo It carries
so much weight when other people cite ldquoSome guy on CNBC from an
eponymous firm with a tie and a smilerdquo A hard reality is that what often
matters most in finance will never win a Nobel Prize Humility and room for
error
11 The social utility of money coming at the direct expense of
growing money wealth is what you donrsquot see
I used to park cars at a hotel This was in the mid-2000s in Los Angeles
when real estate money flowed I assumed that a customer driving a Ferrari
was rich Many were But as I got to know some of these people I realized
they werenrsquot that successful At least not nearly what I assumed Many were
mediocre successes who spent most of their money on a car
If you see someone driving a $200000 car the only data point you have
about their wealth is that they have $200000 less than they did before they
bought the car Or theyrsquore leasing the car which truly offers no indication of
wealth
We tend to judge wealth by what we see We canrsquot see peoplersquos bank accounts
or brokerage statements So we rely on outward appearances to gauge
financial success Cars Homes Vacations Instagram photos
But this is America and one of our cherished industries is helping people
fake it until they make it
Wealth in fact is what you donrsquot see Itrsquos the cars not purchased The
diamonds not bought The renovations postponed the clothes forgone and
the first-class upgrade declined Itrsquos assets in the bank that havenrsquot yet been
converted into the stuff you see
But thatrsquos not how we think about wealth because you canrsquot contextualize
what you canrsquot see
Singer Rihanna nearly went broke after overspending and sued her financial
advisor The advisor responded ldquoWas it really necessary to tell her that if
you spend money on things you will end up with the things and not the
moneyrdquo
You can laugh But the truth is yes people need to be told that When most
people say they want to be a millionaire what they really mean is ldquoI want to
spend a million dollarsrdquo which is literally the opposite of being a millionaire
This is especially true for young people
A key use of wealth is using it to control your time and providing you with
options Financial assets on a balance sheet offer that But they come at the
direct expense of showing people how much wealth you have with material
stuff
12 A tendency toward action in a field where the first rule of
compounding is to never interrupt it unnecessarily
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1117
If your sink breaks you grab a wrench and fix it If your arm breaks you put
it in a cast
What do you do when your financial plan breaks
The first question ndash and this goes for personal finance business finance and
investing plans ndash is how do you know when itrsquos broken
A broken sink is obvious But a broken investment plan is open to
interpretation Maybe itrsquos just temporarily out of favor Maybe yoursquore
experiencing normal volatility Maybe you had a bunch of one-off expenses
this quarter but your savings rate is still adequate Itrsquos hard to know
When itrsquos hard to distinguish broken from temporarily out of favor the
tendency is to default to the former and spring into action You start fiddling
with the knobs to find a fix This seems like the responsible thing to do
because when virtually everything else in your life is broken the correct
action is to fix it
There are times when money plans need to be fixed Oh are there ever But
there is also no such thing as a long-term money plan that isnrsquot susceptible to
volatility Occasional upheaval is usually part of a standard plan
When volatility is guaranteed and normal but is often treated as something
that needs to be fixed people take actions that ultimately just interrupts the
execution of a good plan ldquoDonrsquot do anythingrdquo are the most powerful words
in finance But they are both hard for individuals to accept and hard for
professionals to charge a fee for So we fiddle Far too much
13 Underestimating the need for room for error not just
financially but mentally and physically
Ben Graham once said ldquoThe purpose of the margin of safety is to render the
forecast unnecessaryrdquo
There is so much wisdom in this quote But the most common response even
if subconsciously is ldquoThanks Ben But Irsquom good at forecastingrdquo
People underestimate the need for room for error in almost everything they
do that involves money Two things cause this One is the idea that your view
of the future is right driven by the uncomfortable feeling that comes from
admitting the opposite The second is that yoursquore therefore doing yourself
economic harm by not taking actions that exploit your view of the future
coming true
But room for error is underappreciated and misunderstood Itrsquos often viewed
as a conservative hedge used by those who donrsquot want to take much risk or
arenrsquot confident in their views But when used appropriately itrsquos the opposite
Room for error lets you endure and endurance lets you stick around long
enough to let the odds of benefiting from a low-probability outcome fall in
your favor The biggest gains occur infrequently either because they donrsquot
happen often or because they take time to compound So the person with
enough room for error in part of their strategy to let them endure hardship
in the other part of their strategy has an edge over the person who gets wiped
out game over insert more tokens when theyrsquore wrong
There are also multiple sides to room for error Can you survive your assets
declining by 30 On a spreadsheet maybe yes ndash in terms of actually paying
your bills and staying cash-flow positive But what about mentally It is easy
to underestimate what a 30 decline does to your psyche Your confidence
may become shot at the very moment opportunity is at its highest You ndash or
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1217
your spouse ndash may decide itrsquos time for a new plan or new career I know
several investors who quit after losses because they were exhausted
Physically exhausted Spreadsheets can model the historic frequency of big
declines But they cannot model the feeling of coming home looking at your
kids and wondering if yoursquove made a huge mistake that will impact their
lives
14 A tendency to be influenced by the actions of other people who
are playing a different financial game than you are
Cisco stock went up three-fold in 1999 Why Probably not because people
actually thought the company was worth $600 billion Burton Malkiel once
pointed out that Ciscorsquos implied growth rate at that valuation meant it would
become larger than the entire US economy within 20 years
Its stock price was going up because short-term traders thought it would
keep going up And they were right for a long time That was the game they
were playing ndash ldquothis stock is trading for $60 and I think itrsquoll be worth $65
before tomorrowrdquo
But if you were a long-term investor in 1999 $60 was the only price available
to buy So you may have looked around and said to yourself ldquoWow maybe
others know something I donrsquotrdquo And you went along with it You even felt
smart about it But then the traders stopped playing their game and you ndash
and your game ndash was annihilated
What you donrsquot realize is that the traders moving the marginal price are
playing a totally different game than you are And if you start taking cues
from people playing a different game than you are you are bound to be
fooled and eventually become lost since different games have different rules
and different goals
Few things matter more with money than understanding your own time
horizon and not being persuaded by the actions and behaviors of people
playing different games
This goes beyond investing How you save how you spend what your
business strategy is how you think about money when you retire and how
you think about risk may all be influenced by the actions and behaviors of
people who are playing different games than you are
Personal finance is deeply personal and one of the hardest parts is learning
from others while realizing that their goals and actions might be miles
removed from whatrsquos relevant to your own life
15 An attachment to financial entertainment due to the fact that
money is emotional and emotions are revved up by argument
extreme views flashing lights and threats to your wellbeing
If the average Americarsquos blood pressure went up by 3 my guess is a few
newspapers would cover it on page 16 nothing would change and wersquod move
on But if the stock market falls 3 well no need to guess how we might
respond This is from 2015 ldquoPresident Barack Obama has been briefed on
Mondayrsquos choppy global market movementrdquo
Why does financial news of seemingly low importance overwhelm news that
is objectively more important
Because finance is entertaining in a way other things ndash orthodontics
gardening marine biology ndash are not Money has competition rules upsets
wins losses heroes villains teams and fans that makes it tantalizingly close
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1317
to a sporting event But itrsquos even an addiction level up from that because
money is like a sporting event where yoursquore both the fan and the player with
outcomes affecting you both emotionally and directly
Which is dangerous
It helps Irsquove found when making money decisions to constantly remind
yourself that the purpose of investing is to maximize returns not minimize
boredom Boring is perfectly fine Boring is good If you want to frame this
as a strategy remind yourself opportunity lives where others arenrsquot and
others tend to stay away from whatrsquos boring
16 Optimism bias in risk-taking or ldquoRussian Roulette should
statistically workrdquo syndrome An over attachment to favorable
odds when the downside is unacceptable in any circumstance
Nassim Taleb says ldquoYou can be risk loving and yet completely averse to
ruinrdquo
The idea is that you have to take risk to get ahead but no risk that could wipe
you out is ever worth taking The odds are in your favor when playing
Russian Roulette But the downside is never worth the potential upside
The odds of something can be in your favor ndash real estate prices go up most
years and most years yoursquoll get a paycheck every other week ndash but if
something has 95 odds of being right then 5 odds of being wrong means
you will almost certainly experience the downside at some point in your life
And if the cost of the downside is ruin the upside the other 95 of the time
likely isnrsquot worth the risk no matter how appealing it looks
Leverage is the devil here It pushes routine risks into something capable of
producing ruin The danger is that rational optimism most of the time masks
the odds of ruin some of the time in a way that lets us systematically
underestimate risk Housing prices fell 30 last decade A few companies
defaulted on their debt This is capitalism ndash it happens But those with
leverage had a double wipeout Not only were they left broke but being
wiped out erased every opportunity to get back in the game at the very
moment opportunity was ripe A homeowner wiped out in 2009 had no
chance of taking advantage of cheap mortgage rates in 2010 Lehman
Brothers had no chance of investing in cheap debt in 2009
My own money is barbelled I take risks with one portion and am a terrified
turtle with the other This is not inconsistent but the psychology of money
would lead you to believe that it is I just want to ensure I can remain
standing long enough for my risks to pay off Again you have to survive to
succeed
A key point here is that few things in money are as valuable as options The
ability to do what you want when you want with who you want and why
you want has infinite ROI
17 A preference for skills in a field where skills donrsquot matter if
they arenrsquot matched with the right behavior
This is where Grace and Richard come back in There is a hierarchy of
investor needs and each topic here has to be mastered before the one above
it matters
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1417
Richard was very skilled at the top of this pyramid but he failed the bottom
blocks so none of it mattered Grace mastered the bottom blocks so well that
the top blocks were hardly necessary
18 Denial of inconsistencies between how you think the world
should work and how the world actually works driven by a desire
to form a clean narrative of cause and effect despite the inherent
complexities of everything involving money
Someone once described Donald Trump as ldquoUnable to distinguish between
what happened and what he thinks should have happenedrdquo Politics aside I
think everyone does this
There are three parts to this
You see a lot of information in the world
You canrsquot process all of it So you have to filter
You only filter in the information that meshes with the way you think the
world should work
Since everyone wants to explain what they see and how the world works with
clean narratives inconsistencies between what we think should happen and
what actually happens are buried
An example Higher taxes should slow economic growth ndash thatrsquos a common
sense narrative But the correlation between tax rates and growth rates is
hard to spot So if you hold onto the narrative between taxes and growth
you say there must be something wrong with the data And you may be right
But if you come across someone else pushing aside data to back up their
narrative ndash say arguing that hedge funds have to generate alpha otherwise
no one would invest in them ndash you spot what you consider a bias There are a
thousand other examples Everyone just believes what they want to believe
even when the evidence shows something else Stories over statistics
Accepting that everything involving money is driven by illogical emotions
and has more moving parts than anyone can grasp is a good start to
remembering that history is the study of things happening that people didnrsquot
think would or could happen This is especially true with money
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1517
19 Political beliefs driving financial decisions influenced by
economics being a misbehaved cousin of politics
I once attended a conference where a well known investor began his talk by
saying ldquoYou know when President Obama talks about clinging to guns and
bibles That is me folks And Irsquom going to tell you today about how his
reckless policies are impacting the economyrdquo
I donrsquot care what your politics are there is no possible way you can make
rational investment decisions with that kind of thinking
But itrsquos fairly common Look at what happens in 2016 on this chart The rate
of GDP growth jobs growth stock market growth interest rates ndash go down
the list ndash did not materially change Only the president did
Years ago I published a bunch of economic performance numbers by
president And it drove people crazy because the data often didnrsquot mesh with
how they thought it should based on their political beliefs Soon after a
journalist asked me to comment on a story detailing how statistically
Democrats preside over stronger economies than Republicans I said you
couldnrsquot make that argument because the sample size is way too small But
he pushed and pushed and wrote a piece that made readers either cheer or
sweat depending on their beliefs
The point is not that politics donrsquot influence the economy But the reason this
is such a sensitive topic is because the data often surprises the heck out of
people which itself is a reason to realize that the correlation between politics
and economics isnrsquot as clear as yoursquod like to think it is
20 The three-month bubble Extrapolating the recent past into
the near future and then overestimating the extent to which
whatever you anticipate will happen in the near future will impact
your future
News headlines in the month after 911 are interesting Few entertain the
idea that the attack was a one-off the next massive terrorist attack was
certain to be around the corner ldquoAnother catastrophic terrorist attack is
inevitable and only a matter of timerdquo one defense analyst said in 2002 ldquoA
top counterterrorism official says itrsquos lsquoa question of when not ifrdquo wrote
another headline Beyond the anticipation that another attack was imminent
was a belief that it would affect people the same way The Today Show ran a
segment pitching parachutes for office workers to keep under their desks in
case they needed to jump out of a skyscraper
Believing that what just happened will keep happening shows up constantly
in psychology We like patterns and have short memories The added feeling
682018 The Psychology of Money middot Collaborative Fund
httpwwwcollaborativefundcomblogthe-psychology-of-money 1617
that a repeat of what just happened will keep affecting you the same way is
an offshoot And when yoursquore dealing with money it can be a torment
Every big financial win or loss is followed by mass expectations of more wins
and losses With it comes a level of obsession over the effects of those events
repeating that can be wildly disconnected from your long-term goals
Example The stock market falling 40 in 2008 was followed uninterrupted
for years with forecasts of another impending plunge Expecting what just
happened to happen soon again is one thing and an error in itself But not
realizing that your long-term investing goals could remain intact unharmed
even if we have another big plunge is the dangerous byproduct of recency
bias ldquoMarkets tend to recover over time and make new highsrdquo was not a
popular takeaway from the financial crisis ldquoMarkets can crash and crashes
suckrdquo was despite the former being so much more practical than the latter
Most of the time something big happening doesnrsquot increase the odds of it
happening again Itrsquos the opposite as mean reversion is a merciless law of
finance But even when something does happen again most of the time it
doesnrsquot ndash or shouldnrsquot ndash impact your actions in the way yoursquore tempted to
think because most extrapolations are short term while most goals are long
term A stable strategy designed to endure change is almost always superior
to one that attempts to guard against whatever just happened happening
again
If therersquos a common denominator in these itrsquos a preference for humility
adaptability long time horizons and skepticism of popularity around
anything involving money Which can be summed up as Be prepared to roll
with the punches
Jiddu Krishnamurti spent years giving spiritual talks He became more
candid as he got older In one famous talk he asked the audience if theyrsquod
like to know his secret
He whispered ldquoYou see I donrsquot mind what happensrdquo
That might be the best trick when dealing with the psychology of money
FEATURED
Sign up for more Collaborative Fund content
Jun 1 2018 by Morgan Housel middot morganhousel
Email address Submit
larr PREV NEXTrarr